Asus TW300-E5/PI4 User Manual
TW300-E5/PI4 Intel î LGA775 Core⢠2 Extreme / Core⢠2 Quad / Core⢠2 Duo Series W orkstation User â s Manaual
ii Copyright é 2008 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or îÂÂtness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, ofîÂÂcers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of proîÂÂts, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. SpeciîÂÂcations and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only , and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe. E3822 First Edition May 2008
iii Contents Contents ...................................................................................................... iii Notices ....................................................................................................... viii Safety information ...................................................................................... ix About this guide .......................................................................................... x Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents ........................................................... 1-2 1.2 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.3î SystemîÂÂspeciîÂÂcations ................................................................. 1-3 1.4 Front panel features ..................................................................... 1-5 1.5 Rear panel features ...................................................................... 1-6 1.6 Internal features ........................................................................... 1-7 1.7 LED information ........................................................................... 1-8 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs ............................................................ 1-8 1.7.2 LAN (RJ-45) LEDs .......................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ............................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the left side cover ........................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover ........................................ 2- 3 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink ............................................. 2-8 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations ................................................... 2-1 1 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-12 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-12 2.5 Installing hard disk drives ......................................................... 2-13 2.6 Installing 5.25-inch drives ......................................................... 2-15 2.6.1 Removing the front panel cover .................................... 2-15 2.6.2 Installing an additional optical drive .............................. 2-16 2.7 Expansion cards ........................................................................ 2-19 2.7.1 Installing expansion cards ............................................. 2-19 2.7.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-20
iv Contents 2.7.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-2 1 2.8 Removing components ............................................................. 2-22 2.8.1 Removing the îÂÂoppy disk drive ..................................... 2-22 2.8.2 Removing the system fan ............................................. 2-2 3 2.8.3 Removing the SA T A backplane ..................................... 2-24 2.9 Connecting cables ..................................................................... 2-26 Chapter 3: Motherboard info 3.1 Motherboard layouts .................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Jumpers ........................................................................................ 3-6 3.3 Connectors ................................................................................... 3-8 3.3.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................... 3-8 3.3.2 Internal connectors ........................................................ 3-1 1 Chapter 4: BIOS infomation 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-2 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-5 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4- 9 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ......................................................... 4-1 1 4.2.2 Menu bar ........................................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.3 Navigation keys .............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 4-12 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ....................................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help ................................................................. 4-12 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-1 3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-13
v Contents 4.3.5 S A T A 1 ~ 6 . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 4 - 1 4 4.3.6 SA T A ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-15 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-16 4.3.8 System Information ....................................................... 4-17 4.4 Ai T weaker menu ........................................................................ 4-18 4.4.1 Ai Overclock T uner ....................................................... 4-18 4.4.2 CPU Ratio Control ....................................................... 4-1 9 4.4.3 FSB Strap to North Bridge ........................................... 4-19 4.4.4 DRAM Frequency ........................................................ 4-20 4.4.5 DRAM Command Rate ................................................ 4-20 4.4.6 DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A/B ............................. 4-20 4.4.7 DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A/B ............................... 4-20 4.4.8 DRAM T iming Control .................................................. 4-20 4.4.9 DRAM Static Read Control .......................................... 4-21 4.4.10 Ai Clock T wister ............................................................ 4-2 1 4.4.1 1 T ransaction Booster ..................................................... 4-22 4.4.12 CPU V oltage ............................................................... 4-22 4.4.13 CPU PLL V oltage ......................................................... 4-22 4.4.14 FSB T ermination V oltage .............................................. 4-22 4.4.15 DRAM V oltage ............................................................. 4-22 4.4.16 North Bridge V oltage .................................................... 4-22 4.4.17 South Bridge V oltage ................................................... 4-23 4.4.18 Clock Over-Charging V oltage ...................................... 4-2 3 4.4.19 CPU Spread Spectrum ................................................ 4-2 3 4.4.20 PCIE Spread Spectrum ................................................ 4-24 4.5 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-25 4.5.1 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-25 4.5.2 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-27 4.5.3 OnBoard Devices ConîÂÂguration ................................... 4-2 8 4.5.4 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-29 4.5.5 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-30 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-31 4.6.1 Suspend Mode ............................................................. 4-31 4.6.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-31 4.6.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-31
vi Contents 4.6.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-31 4.6.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-32 4.6.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-3 3 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-35 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-35 4.7.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-36 4.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-37 4.8 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-39 4.8.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-39 4.8.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle ......................................................... 4-40 4.8.3 Ai Net 2 ......................................................................... 4-41 4.9 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-42 ChapterîÂÂ5:î RAIDîÂÂconîÂÂguratio n 5.1î RAIDîÂÂconîÂÂgurations .................................................................... 5-2 5.1.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions .............................................................. 5-2 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 5-3 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 5-3 5.2 Marvel î îÂÂ88SE6145îÂÂRAIDîÂÂBIOSîÂÂConîÂÂgurationîÂÂUtility ................. 5-4 5.2.1 Creating a RAID set ........................................................ 5-5 5.2.2 Deleting an array ............................................................. 5-8 5.3 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-10 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ....................................... 5-1 1 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 5-13 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ....................... 5-14 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) ...................................... 5-15 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 5-16 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID ........................................ 5-17 5.3.7 Rebuilding the RAID ..................................................... 5-1 7 5.3.8 Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager .................... 5-20 5.3.9 Setting the Boot array use MB BIOS Setup Utility ........ 5-20 5.3.10 Global Array Manager ................................................... 5-21 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS ...... 6-2
vii 6.1.2 Creating a RAID/SA T A driver disk in Windows î .............. 6-2 6.1.3 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 6- 3 6.1.4 Installing an operating system ........................................ 6-5 6.2 Support DVD information ............................................................ 6-6 6.2.1 Running the support DVD ............................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 6- 8 6.2.4 Make Disk menu ........................................................... 6-10 6.2.5 Manual menu ................................................................. 6-1 1 6.2.6 ASUS Contact information ............................................. 6-1 1 6.2.7 Other information .......................................................... 6-12 6.3 Software information ................................................................. 6-14 6.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠......................................................... 6-14 6.3.2 Audio conîÂÂgurations ..................................................... 6-16 6.3.3 ASUS PC Probe II ......................................................... 6-24 6.3.4 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................... 6-30 6.3.5 ASUS AI Gear 2 ............................................................ 6-32 6.3.6 ASUS AI Nap ................................................................ 6-3 3 6.3.7 ASUS AI N.O.S. ............................................................ 6-34 6.3.8 ASUS Q-Fan 2 .............................................................. 6-35 6.3.9 ASUS AI Booster ........................................................... 6-36 Appendix: Reference information A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-2 Using the Intel î EM64T feature ...................................................... A- 2 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-2 A.2.1 System requirements ...................................................... A- 2 A.2.2 Using the EIST ................................................................ A-3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-4 Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................ A- 4 A.4î SimpleîÂÂîÂÂxes ..................................................................................A-5 Contents
viii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. W ARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âÂÂs authority to operate this equipment. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Th is cla ss B di git al ap pa rat us com pl ie s w ith C an adi an ICE S- 00 3. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix Safety information Electrical Safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your dealer . Ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you service. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your dealer . Operation Safety ⢠Servicing of this product or units is to be performed by trained service personnel only . ⢠Before operating the server , carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server , make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user âÂÂs safety . Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock. Lithium-Ion Battery W arning CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety W arning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System CAUTION! This server system is heavy . Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system.
x About this guide Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of conîÂÂguring a workstation. Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the workstation, including sections on front panel and rear panel speciîÂÂcations. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. Chapter 3: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the workstation. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 4. Chapter 4: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. 5.î ChapterîÂÂ5:îÂÂRAIDîÂÂconîÂÂguration This chapter provides information on how to conîÂÂgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. 6. Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone workstation supports. 7. Appendix: Reference information This section provides information about the CPU features and technologies and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone workstation.
xi Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. W ARNING : Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION : Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE : T ips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
xii
1- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter describes the general features of the workstation, including sections on front panel and rear panel speciîÂÂcations. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . 1.1 System package contents Check your system package for the following items. Model Name TW300-E5/PI4 Chassis ASUS T10 Pedestal Chassis Motherboard ASUS P5E WS Professional Component 1 x 450W Single Power Supply 1 x 95mm System Fan 5 x SA T A Cables 1 x 7-in-1 Card Reader 4 x Internal HDD trays 1 x Front I/O Board Accessories 1 x ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 UserâÂÂs Guide 1 x TW300-E5/PI4 Support CD 1 x Bag of Screws 1 x AC Power Cable 1 x CPU Heatsink Optional Items - 1.2 Serial number label Before requesting support from the ASUS T echnical Support team, you must take note of the productâÂÂs serial number containing 12 characters such as xxxxxxxxxxxx. See the îÂÂgure below . With the correct serial number of the product, ASUS T echnical Support team members can then offer a quicker and satisfying solution to your problems. xxxxxxxxxxxx TW300-E5/PI4
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-3 1.3î SystemîÂÂspeciî¿cations The ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 is a workstation featuring the ASUS P5E WS Professional motherboard. The workstation supports Intelî LGA775 Core⢠2 Extreme / Core⢠2 Quad / Core⢠2 Duo processors with EM64T technology , plus other latest technologies through the chipsets onboard. (continued on the next page) Model Name TW300-E5/PI4 Processor / System Bus 1 x Socket LGA775 Quad-core: Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme QX9000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme QX6000 Series Intel î Core⢠2 Quad Q9000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Quad Q6000 Series Dual-core: Intel î Core⢠2 Duo E8000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Duo E6000 Series FSB 1333 / 1066 / 800 MHz with EM64T Core Logic Intel î X38 MCH Intel î ICH9R PCI-X NEC upd720404 ASUS Features Q Fan â Memory T otal Slots 4 (Dual-Channel) Capacity Maximum up to 8GB Memory T ype DDR2 800 / 667 ECC and Non-ECC, Unbuffered Memory Size 512MB, 1GB, and 2GB Expansion Slots T otal PCI/PCI- X/PCI-E Slots 6 Slot T ype 2 x PCIe x16 Gen2 slots (x16 link) 1 x PCIe x1 slot (x1 link) 1 x PCI-X 64bit/133MHz slot 2 x PCI 32-bit / 33MHz slots (5V) Storage SA T A Controller 6 x SA T AII 300MB/s ports Intel î ICH9R: Intel Matrix Storage (for Windows only) - Supports software RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10 Marvell 88SE6145 SA T A Controller: - Supports software RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10 (for Windows) - Supports software RAID 0, 1, and 10 (for Linux) HDD Bays I = internal A or S will be hot-swappable 4 x Internal SA T AII HDD Bays
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 Networking LAN 2 x Marvell î 8056 PCI-E GbE LANs Auxiliary Storage FDD / CD / DVD 1 x 7-in-1 Card Reader 2 x 5.25â Optical Drives (Options: 16X DVD-ROM / DVD-RW) Graphic VGA Graphic Add-on Card ConîÂÂguration Option: Option 1: Professional 2D - NVIDIA Quadro NVS290 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) Option 2: Entry 3D - NVIDIA Quadro FX370 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) - NVIDIA Quadro FX570 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) Option 3: Mid-range 3D - NVIDIA Quadro FX 1700 (512 MB, up to 2 cards) Onboard I/O 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 2 x RJ-45 ports 1 x S/PDIF Out port (Coaxial Optical) 8 x USB 2.0 ports (Front x 2, Rear x 6) 2 x eSA T A ports 1 x IEEE1394a port 6 x Audio ports OS Support Genuine Windows î XP Professional 32 / 64-bit Genuine Windows î Vista Business 32 / 64-bit Anti-virus Software Norton î Internet Security 2007 (T rial Version) Dimension (HH x WW x DD) 441mm x 207mm x 517mm Net Weight Kg (CPU, DRAM & HDD not inclu ded) 16 Kg Power Supply 450W Single Power Supply Environment Operation temperature: 10ðC~35ðC Non operation temperature: -40ðC~70ðC Non operation humidity: 20%~90% (Non- condensing) *SpeciîÂÂcationsîÂÂareîÂÂsubjectîÂÂtoîÂÂchangeîÂÂwithoutîÂÂnotice.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-5 1.4 Front panel features The barebone server displays a simple yet stylish front panel with easily accessible features. The power and reset buttons, LED indicators, optical drive, and two USB ports are located on the front panel. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, CD/DVD-ROM drive, îÂÂoppy drive, and USB 2.0 ports are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. Refer to section 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs for the LED descriptions. Optical Drive Empty 5.25-inch bay 7-in-1 Card Reader USB 2.0 ports Power button Reset button Power LED HDD access LED
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1.5 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a power supply module, and a vent for the system fan. The ports for the PS/2 keyboard, PS/2 mouse, USB, VGA, and Gigabit LAN do not appear on the rear panel if motherboard is not present. Power supply module Expansion slots Power supply switch Power cord connector PS/2 keyboard port USB 2.0 ports Optical S/PDIF Out port 8-channel audio Coaxial S/PDIF Out port USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports External SA T A ports LAN1 (RJ-45) port LAN2 (RJ-45) port IEEE 1394a port 95mm system fan
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-7 1.6 Internal features The barebone server includes the basic components as shown. 1. Power supply unit 2. 95mm system fan 3. ASUS P5E WS Professional motherboard 4. Expansion card locks 5. Optical drive 6. 5.25-inch drive bay 7. 7-in-1 Card Reader 8. Front I/O board (hidden) 9. Internal HDD bays 10. Chassis intrusion switch 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1.7 LED information 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs 1.7.2 LAN (RJ-45) LEDs LED Icon Display status Description Power LED ON System power ON HDD Access LED OFF Blinking No activity Read/write data into the HDD ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection HDD Access LED Power LED SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2- This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover 2.1.1 Removing the left side cover Y ou have to remove the left side cover to install or replace internal components of the server system. ⢠Ensure that you unplug the power cord before removing the side cover . ⢠T ake extra care when removing the side cover. Keep your îÂÂngers from components inside the chassis that can cause injury , such as the CPU fan, rear fan, and other sharp-edged parts. T o remove the left side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the left side cover to the chassis. 2. Slide the left side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. 2 1 1
2-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover Most internal components can be installed or replaced after removing the left side cover . However , for components such as Serial A T A hard disk drives, you may have to remove the right side cover for easier component installation or replacement. T o remove the right side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the left side cover to the chassis. 2 2. Slide the right side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. 1 1
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 P5E WS PRO î 2.2 Motherboard overview The barebone server comes with the P5E WS Professional motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by nine (9) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below . Ensure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Refer to Chapter 3: Motherboard information for detailed information on the motherboard.
2-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Xeon 3300 / 3200 / 3100 / 3000 Series processor in the 775-land package 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional CPU Socket 775
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should îÂÂt into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU!
2-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Core 2 Extreme / Core 2 Quad / Core 2 Duo Series LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 T o install the CPU cooler and fan 1. Place the cooler on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four screws match the holes on the support plate. 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink The Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme / Core⢠2 Quad / Core⢠2 Duo Series processors require an Intel certiîÂÂed or ASUS qualiîÂÂed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. When you buy a boxed Intel CPU, the package includes the cooler , fan, retention brackets, screws, thermal grease, installation manual, and other items that are necessary for CPU installation. ⢠Ensure that you have applied the thermal grease to the top of the CPU before installing the heatsink and fan. ⢠Refer to the installation manual that came with the CPU package for details on heatsink/fan assmbly and installation. 2. Use a screwdriver to tighten the four cooler screws in a diagonal sequence. A A B B
2-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN . Do not forget to connect the CPU_F AN connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate II (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets to support 240-pin DDR2 modules. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 This chipset ofîÂÂcially supports DDR2 800/667MHz. With the ASUS Super Memspeed T echnology , the motherboard natively supports up to DDR2 1066MHz and provides more ratio setting items than the chipset ofîÂÂcially supports. Refer to the table below for details. FSB 1333 1066 DDR2 1066 800 667 1066 800 667
2-1 1 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 64-bit Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition Windows î Vista x64 Edition ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-800 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-667. If this happens, contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-800 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-667 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . 2.4.2î MemoryîÂÂconîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB ECC and non-ECC, unbuffered DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîÂÂguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠If you install four 1GB memory modules, the system may only recognize less than 3GB of total memory because of address space allocation for other critical functions. This limitation appears on Windows î Vista 32-bit / Windows î XP 32-bit operation systems since it does not support Physical Address Extension (P AE) mode. ⢠If you install Windows î Vista 32-bit / Windows î XP 32-bit operation system, a total memory of less than 3GB is recommended. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 1 2
2-13 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.5 Installing hard disk drives The server system supports four Serial A T A hard disk drives through screw-free hard disk drive holders. T o install a Serial A T A hard disk drive 1. Follow the instruction in section 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover to remove the right side cover . 2. Slightly push inward the HDD holder handles to release the HDD holder lock from the HDD bay , as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 3. Carefully pull the HDD holder out of the HDD bay , as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 2 2 3 4. Locate the four pin caps on the HDD holder . Align one side of the HDD screw holes to one side of the cage pin caps, as shown in the right îÂÂgure. Pin cap 4 5. Follow the direction of the arrow in the right îÂÂgure and slightly bend the HDD holder .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 6. Attach the other side of the HDD screw holes to the cage pin caps, as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 7. Carefully insert the HDD holder and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until the cage handles îÂÂx to the HDD bay .
2-15 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.6 Installing 5.25-inch drives Ensure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard and other system components! 1 2 The system comes with two 5.25-inch drive bays located on the upper front part of the chassis. An optical drive that comes standard/optional with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1). The lower bay (labled 2) is available for additional 5.25-inch optical, zip, or îÂÂoppy disk drives. Y ou must remove the front panel cover before installing a 5.25-inch drive. 2.6.1 Removing the front panel cover T o remove the front panel cover 1. Follow the instructions in section 2.1 Chassis cover to remove both the side covers. 2. Locate the front cover slot on the bottom of the front cover .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 3. Carefully remove the front panel cover , and then set aside. 2.6.2 Installing an additional optical drive ConîÂÂgure your optical drive as Master/Slave device before installing it to the drive bay . Refer to the optical drive documentation for details. T o install an additional optical drive 1. Select the drive bay you intend to use. Push the knock down metal cover in and out of the chassis until it is removed. T ake extra care when removing the knock down metal cover . Use tools such as a screw driver to bend and remove the metal cover to avoid physical injury .
2-17 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2. Follow the direction of the arrows in the îÂÂgure to unlock and lift the drive bay lock. 3. Carefully insert the drive to the bay . 4. Align the drive to the bay screw holes, and then lock the drive bay lock. 5. Connect a 40-pin IDE cable (from the îÂÂrst optical drive) and a 4-pin power plug (from the power supply unit) to the connectors on the drive.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 6. Remove the front panel bay cover opposite the drive bay you used by pressing the hooks inward. 7. Reinstall the front panel and side covers when done.
2-19 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.7 Expansion cards 2.7.1 Installing expansion cards The system comes with two PCI Express x16 slots (x8 link), one PCI Express x1 slot (x1 link), one PCI-X 64bit/133MHz slot, and two PCI 32-bit/33MHz/5V slots. Ensure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing an expansion card. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard and other system components! T o install an expansion card 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Lay the system on its side on a îÂÂat, stable surface. 3. Select the slot that you intend to use, and then remove the knock down metal cover . 4. Slightly push down the expansion card lock to unlock it from the chassis. 5. Lift the expansion card lock by following the direction of the arrow in the right îÂÂgure.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 6. Align the card connector with the slot, then press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 7. Restore the expansion card lock to its original position and push it down until you hear a click sound. 2.7.2î ConîÂÂguringîÂÂanîÂÂexpansionîÂÂcard After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2-21 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.7.3 Interrupt assignments IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI Slot 1 Shared â â â â â â â PCI Slot 2 â Shared â â â â â â LAN 1 (8056) â â Shared â â â â â LAN 2 (8056) â â â Shared â â â â SA T A (Marvell) Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X16_1 Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X16_2 Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X1_1 â Shared â â â â â â PCIX_1 â Shared â â â â â â USB Controller 1 â â â â â â â Shared USB Controller 2 â â â Shared â â â â USB Controller 3 â â Shared â â â â â USB Controller 4 Shared â â â â â â â USB Controller 5 Shared â â â â â â â USB Controller 6 â â â â â Shared â â USB 2.0 Controller 1 â â â â â â â Shared USB 2.0 Controller 2 â â Shared â â â â â SA T A Controller 1 â â Shared â â â â â SA T A Controller 2 â â â â â â Shared â Azalia ALC888 â â â â â â Shared â IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System timer 1 2 Keyboard controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 4 12 Communications port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy disk controller 7 15 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 1 1 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 compatible mouse port* 13 8 Numeric data processor 14 9 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 15 10 IRQ holder for PCI steering* * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2.8 Removing components Y ou may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing other system components, or when replacing a defective component. This section tells how to remove the following components: 1. Floppy disk drive (FDD) 2. System fan 3. SA T A backplane 2.8.1î RemovingîÂÂtheîÂÂîÂÂoppyîÂÂdiskîÂÂdrive T o remove the FDD 1. Disconnect the FDD power plug and signal cable. 3. Carefully pull the FDD bay from the chassis. 4. Remove the four screws from the FDD bay to release the FDD.
2-23 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.8.2 Removing the system fan T o remove the system fan 1. Disconnect the chassis fan cable from the CHA_F AN1 connector on the motherboard. 2. Locate and remove four system fan screws at the rear panel. Keep the screws for later use. Hold the system fan with one hand while removing the system screws. 3. Remove the system fan, and then set aside. P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 T o remove the SA T A backplane 1. Remove the right side cover îÂÂrst. Disconnect all SA T A cables and power cables connected to the SA T A backplane. 2.8.3 Removing the SA T A backplane Remove all hard drives before removing the SA T A backplane. 2. Remove all the six screws on the back of the SA T A backplane holder with a screwdriver . 3. T ake out the SA T A backplane with the backplane holder and place on a îÂÂat surface. The TW300-E5/PI4 Workstation uses only the four SA T A HDD connectors labelled DEVICE1- 4. 4 3 2 1
2-25 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4. Remove all the six screws on the holder to replace the SA T A backplane.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 2.9 Connecting cables The TW300-E5/PI4 chassis includes the power and signal cables that you need to connect to the motherboard, storage drives, and other devices that you intend to install. ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. Y ou do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on the connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard 1. 24-pin A TX 12V power plug 2. 4-pin A TX 12V power plug 3. Card Reader cable 4. Front panel USB 2.0 cable 5. IDE signal cable 6. Serial A T A signal cables 7. System panel cable 8. System fan cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the workstation. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 3 Motherboard info
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-2 3.1 Motherboard layouts P5E WS Professional Motherboard P ANEL P5 E W S P RO î AAFP CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) FLOPPY Super I/O CD PCIEX16_1 PCI2 CLRTC SB_PWR EA TXPWR CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CHA_FAN2 COM1 EA TX12V LGA775 Intel î X38 IE1394_2 PWR_FAN Intel î ICH9R Marvell î 88E8056 USB78 PCIEX1_1 PCIX_1 LAN2_USB34 KB_USB56 LAN1_USB12 AUDIO F_ESA TA12 SPDIF_O12 VIA VT6308S TPM BIOS CHA_FAN1 DET_X16_1 DET_X1_1 DET_PCIX_1 EXT_SA T A2 EXT_SA T A1 PCIEX16_2 USB910 USB1 112 PCIX_SPEED1 SA T A2 SA T A1 SA T A4 SA T A3 SA T A6 SA T A5 DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DET_PCI2 DET_X16_2 ALC888 PRI_IDE Marvell î 88E6145 NEC upd 720404 PCI1 DET_PCI1 Marvell î 88E8056 ICS Refer to 3.3 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors.
3-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED that lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off AI Slot Detector This motherboard comes with on-board LEDs that light up when the PCIE/PCI devices are not correctly installed. When the power cord is plugged in and the LED lights up, reinstall the device correctly . Refer to the îÂÂgure on the right for the location of the LEDs. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Slot Detectors DET_X16_1 DET_X1_1 DET_PCIX_1 DET_X16_2 DET_PCI1 DET_PCI2 ⢠The PCIEx16_1-2 slots (blue) support PCIE x16 cards only . The AI Slot Detector lights up when you install x1 or x4 cards to these slots. ⢠When the AI Slot Detector lights up for incorrect installation, make sure to turn off the power supply unit before reinstaling the card to avoid electrical shock hazard.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-4 Layout contents Jumper Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC_EN ) 3-6 2. PCI-X Speed setting (3-pin PCIX_SPEED1) 3-7 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 3-8 2. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 3-8 3. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port 3-8 4. IEEE 1394a port 3-8 5. LAN 2 (RJ-45) port 3-8 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 3-8 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 3-8 8. Line In port (light blue) 3-8 9. Line Out port (lime) 3-8 10. Microphone port (pink) 3-9 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 3-9 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 3-9 13. External SA T A ports 3-9 14. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 3-10 15. Optical S/PDIF Out port 3-10 16. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6 3-10
3-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY ) 3-1 1 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE ) 3-12 3. ICH9R Serial A T A connectors [blue] (7-pin SA T A1-6 ) 3-13 4. Marvell î 88SE6145 Serial A T A RAID connectors [black] (7-pin EXT_SA T A1-2) 3-14 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12 ) 3-15 6. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 ) 3-15 7. Optical audio drive connector (4-pin CD) 3-16 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 3-16 9. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1-2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 3-17 10. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS ) 3-17 1 1. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 3-18 12. TPM connector (20-1 pin TPM) 3-18 13 . A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V ) 3-19 14. System panel connector (20-8-pin P ANEL ) 3-20 15. ASUS Q-connector (system panel) 3-21
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-6 3.2 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard battery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery . Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! T o erase the RTC RAM 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1âÂÂ2 (default) to pins 2âÂÂ3. Keep the cap on pins 2âÂÂ3 for about 5âÂÂ10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1âÂÂ2. 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear RTC (Default) 1 2 2 3
3-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2. PCI-X Speed setting (3-pin PCIX_SPEED1) This jumper allows you to set the PCI-X slotâÂÂs maximum frequency capability . TheîÂÂjumperîÂÂcapîÂÂonîÂÂpinsîÂÂ1-2: 133 MHz capability for the PCI-X slot. TheîÂÂjumperîÂÂcapîÂÂonîÂÂpinsîÂÂ2-3: 100 MHz capability for the PCI-X slot. P5E W S PRO î 3 2 P5E WS Professional PCIX speed setting PCIX_SPEED1 100MHz 133MHz (Default) 1 2
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-8 3.3 Connectors 3.3.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 2. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 3. LAN1 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 4. IEEE1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. . 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 8. Line In port (light blue). This port connects the tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 9. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port 2 1 5 4 6 13 10 1 1 8 9 7 15 12 3 14 16 Activity/Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection
3-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. External SA T A ports . These ports connect to external Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, 1, 5 or 10 set, install an external Serial A T A hard disk drive to the external Serial A T A port and an internal Serial A T A hard disk drive to the onboard Serial A T A connectors labeled EXT_SA T A1 or EXT_SA T A2. Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. AudioîÂÂ2,îÂÂ4,îÂÂ6,îÂÂorîÂÂ8-channelîÂÂconîÂÂguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Ou Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that yo u ha ve conn ect ed the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Marvell RAID utility and SA T A setup during POST . ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using one of these connectors, set the Marvell SA T A/P A T A Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section 4.5.3îÂÂOnBoardîÂÂDevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. The external SA T A ports support external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-10 14. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 15. Optical S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 16. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. ⢠DO NOT insert dif ferent connectors to these ports. ⢠DO NOT unplug the external Serial A T A box when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 is conîÂÂgured.
3-1 1 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3.3.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34âÂÂ1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-12 ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra A T A cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80 âÂÂconductor IDE cable for Ultra A T A 100/66/33 IDE devices. DriveîÂÂjumperîÂÂsetting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE PIN 1 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâ s IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device.
3-13 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3. ICH9R Serial A T A connectors [blue] (7-pin SA T A1-6) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives and optical disk drives. ⢠Wh en usi ng the con nec tor s i n Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1/2 connector . Refer to the table below for the recommended SA T A hard disk drive connections. ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the ConîÂÂgure SA T A as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section 4.3.6îÂÂSA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. ⢠Before creating a RAID set, refer to 5.1îÂÂRAIDîÂÂConîÂÂgurations or the manual bundled in the motherboard support DVD. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional SA T A connectors SA T A 2 SA T A1 GND RSA TA _TXP2 RSA TA _TXN2 GND RSA TA _RXP2 RSA TA _RXN2 GND GND RSA TA _TXP1 RSA TA _TXN1 GND RSA TA _RXP1 RSA TA _RXN1 GND SA T A3 SA T A4 GND RSA TA _TXP3 RSA TA _TXN3 GND RSA TA _RXP3 RSA TA _RXN3 GND GND RSA TA _TXP4 RSA TA _TXN4 GND RSA TA _RXP4 RSA TA _RXN4 GND SA T A 6 SA T A5 GND RSA TA _TXP6 RSA TA _TXN6 GND RSA TA _RXP6 RSA TA _RXN6 GND GND RSA TA _TXP5 RSA TA _TXN5 GND RSA TA _RXP5 RSA TA _RXN5 GND Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Color Setting Use SA T A 1/2 Blue Master Boot disk SA T A 3/4 Blue Slave Boot/Data disk SA T A 5/6 Blue Master Boot disk Connect the right-angle side of SA T A signal cable to SA T A device. Or you may connect the right-angle side of SA T A cable to the onboard SA T A port to avoid mechanical conîÂÂict with huge graphics cards. Right angle side
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-14 4. Marvell î 88SE6145 Serial A T A RAID connectors [black] (7-pin EXT_SA T A1-2) These connectors are for Serial A T A signal cables that support Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 or RAID 10, install an internal Serial A T A hard disk drive to one of these connectors and an external Serial A T A drive to one of the external SA T A ports. Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Marvell RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional EXT_SA T A connectors EXT_SA T A 2 EXT_SA T A1 GND RSA TA _TXP2 RSA TA _TXN2 GND RSA TA _RXP2 RSA TA _RXN2 GND GND RSA TA _TXP1 RSA TA _TXN1 GND RSA TA _RXP1 RSA TA _RXN1 GND ⢠Please install the Marvell î Controller driver before using the black Serial A T A RAID connectors (EXT_SA T A1-2). Refer to 6.2.4 Make Disk menu for details. ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using one of the Marvell î Serial A T A RAID connectors and one of the external SA T A ports, it is strongly recommended to install the OS on the internal hard disk drive and use the external hard disk drive as a data disk.
3-15 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Y ou can connect the USB cable to ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional USB 2.0 connectors USB 1 1 1 2 USB 5V USB_P12- USB_P12 GND NC USB 5V USB_P1 1- USB_P1 1 GND USB910 USB 5V USB_P10- USB_P10 GND NC USB 5V USB_P9- USB_P9 GND USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 6. IEE E 1394 a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for an IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y o u can connect the 1394 c able to ASU S Q-Con nector (1394, red) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (1394) to the 1394 connector onboard. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 PIN 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-16 7. Optical drive audio co nne cto r (4-pin CD) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional COM port connector PIN 1 COM1
3-17 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 9. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1-2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) The fan c onnect ors su pport co oling fans o f 350 mA~2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A~7 A (84 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! Only the CPU-F AN and CHA-F AN 1-2 connectors support the ASUS Q-F AN 2 feature. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V 10. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pin labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-18 1 1. Front panel audio co nne cto r (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We reco mmend that yo u conn ect a h igh-de îÂÂnitio n fr ont pa nel aud io mod ule to t his co nnector to av ail of the mo therbo ardâ s hi gh-d eîÂÂniti on audi o capa bility . ⢠By default, this connector is set to [HD Audio] . If you want to connect an AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel T ype item in the BIOS setup to [AC'97] . See section 4.5.3 Onboard DevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L POR T2 R POR T2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition 12. TPM con nec tor (20-1 pin TPM) [Optional] This connector supports a T rusted Platform Module (TPM) system, which can securely store keys, digital certiîÂÂcates, passwords, and data. A TPM system also helps enhance network security , protects digital identities, and ensures platform integrity . P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional TPM connector TPM
3-19 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin EA TX12V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 500W to 600W power or above to ensure the system stability . ⢠If you are uncertain about the minimum power supply requirement for your system, refer to the Recommended Power Supply W attage Calculator at http://support.asus.com/PowerSupplyCalculator/PSCalculator . aspx?SLanguage=en-us for details. 13. ATX po wer co nn ec tor s (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plu gs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional A TX power connectors EA TXPW R 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts 5 Volts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground EA TX12V GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-20 ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 14. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
3-21 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 15. Q-Connector (system panel) Y ou can use ASUS Q-Connector to connect / disconnect chassis front panel cables by only a few steps. Directions below shows how to install ASUS Q- Connector . Step2. Properly install the ASUS Q-Connector to the System panel connctor . Step1. Connect correct front panel to ASUS Q-Connector îÂÂrst. Y ou can refer to the marking on Q-Connector itself to know the detail pin deîÂÂnition. Step3. Front panel functions are enabled.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-22
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. Chapter 4 BIOS information
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-2 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS using a îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk, USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support DVD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support DVD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-4 UpdatingîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂthroughîÂÂaîÂÂBIOSîÂÂîÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. P5EWP P5EWP.rom
4-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.2î CreatingîÂÂaîÂÂbootableîÂÂîÂÂoppyîÂÂdisk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/ S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start. Windows î Vista environment a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click from the Windows î desktop, then select Computer. c. Right-click Floppy Disk Drive then click Format to display the Format 3 1/2 Floppy dialog box . d. Select the Create an MS-DOS startup disk check box. e. Click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-6 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk / USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash 2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter>. 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îÂÂash disk or a îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.06 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: WINBOND W25P/X16 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
4-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: MainîÂÂîÂÂlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support DVD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024KB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. UpdatingîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂîÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-8 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support DVD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support DVD or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Prepare the motherboard support DVD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from the support DVD T o recover the BIOS from the support DVD 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support DVD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the DVD for the BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Floppy found! Reading î¿le âÂÂP5EWP.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start îÂÂashing... RecoveringîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂfromîÂÂtheîÂÂUSBîÂÂîÂÂashîÂÂdisk T o recover the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Insert the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the USB port. 2. T urn on the system. 3. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle. When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-10 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable îÂÂrmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS . Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the SPI chip. The îÂÂrmware chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section 4.9 Exit Menu. ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-1 1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Ai T weaker For changing the system performance settings Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration T ools For conîÂÂguring special system functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Mon 08/13/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] SATA 1 [WDC WD800JD-00LSA0] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] SATA Coniguration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂîÂÂelds Menu items
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6î ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂîÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 4.2.7 Pop-up window. 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 03/09/2007] Legac y Disket te A [ 1. 44 M, 3. 5 in] SATA 1 [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 2 [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 3 [No t D ete cte d] SATA 3 [No t D ete cte d] [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 4 [No t D ete cte d] SATA 4 [No t D ete cte d] [N ot D ete cte d] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [720K, 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. ConîÂÂguration options: [Chinese BIG5] [Chinese (GB)] [Japanese] [Français] [German] [English] Refer to section 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Wed 08/22/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] SATA 1 [WDC WD800JD-00LSA0] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] SATA Coniguration System Information
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 S A T A 1 ~ 6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show Not Detected if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : WDC WD800JD-00LSA0 Size : 80.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Select the type of device connected to the system.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-15 DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂgurationîÂÂ[Enhanced] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] Configure SA T A as [IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. ConîÂÂguration options: [IDE] [RAID] [AHCI] ⢠If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the default setting [IDE]. ⢠If you want the Serial A T A hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. ⢠If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. 4.3.6î SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the SA T A devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item. SATA Conî¿guration SATA Conî¿guraton [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA as [IDE] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] SATA Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Options Disabled Compatiable Enhanced
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed throuh BIOS ConîÂÂuration option: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] 4.3.7î AHCIîÂÂConîÂÂguration This menu is the section for AHCI conîÂÂguration. It appears only when you set the ConîÂÂgureîÂÂSA T AîÂÂasî item from the sub-menu of SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration to [AHCI]. AHCI Settings AHCI CD/DVD Boot Time out [15] AHCI Port1 [Not Detected] AHCI Port2 [Not Detected] AHCI Port3 [Not Detected] AHCI Port4 [Not Detected] AHCI Port5 [Not Detected] AHCI Port6 [Not Detected] Some SATA CD/DVD in AHCI mode need to wait ready longer. AHCI CD/DVD Boot Time out [15] Selects the boot time out value for AHCI CD/DVD devices. Congifuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] AHCI Port1~6 [XXXX] Displays the status of auto-detection of SA T A devices. AHCI Port1 Device :Not Detected SATA Port1 [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Enabled] Select the type of devices connected to the system. SA T A Port1 [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device connected to the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Not Installed] SMART Monitoring [Enabled] Allows you to set the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂgration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-17 4.3.8 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. ASUS BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . Select Screen Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main ASUS BIOS Version : 0123 Build Date : 08/27/07 Processor Type : Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo CPU @ 3.00GHz Speed : 3000MHz Count : 2 System Memory Available : 1024MB
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4 Ai Tweaker menu The Ai T weaker menu items allow you to change the settings for the system performance. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Ai T weaker menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. 4.4.1 Ai Overclock T uner [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Select one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂguration options: The following sub-item only appears when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [N.O.S]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [SensitIve] [Heavy Load] Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. N.O.S. The ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. X.M.P . If you install memory module(s) supporting the eXtreme Memory ProîÂÂle (X.M.P .) T echnology , choose this item to set the proîÂÂle(s) supported by your memory module(s) for optimizing the system performance. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. North Bridge Voltage [Auto] South Bridge Voltage [Auto] Clock Over-Charging Voltage [Auto] CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] Scroll down to display the following items: Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage Ai Overclock Tuner [Auto] CPU Ratio Control [Auto] FSB Strap to North Bridge [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Command Rate [Auto] DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A [Auto] DRAM CMD Skew on Channel B [Auto] DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A [Auto] DRAM CLK Skew on Channel B [Auto] DRAM Timing Control [Auto] DRAM Static Read Control [Auto] Ai Clock Twister [Auto] Transaction Booster [Auto] CPU Voltage [Auto] CPU PLL Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] DRAM Voltage [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recomends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-19 T urbo N.O.S. [Overclock 3%] This sub-item appears only when you set the N.O.S. Mode item to either [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy Load]. Allows you to set the maximum overclock percentage for the selected N.O.S. mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] The conîÂÂguration options for the following sub-item vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. eXtreme Memory Profile [Disabled] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [X.M.P .]. Allows you to select the X.M.P . mode supported by your Memory module. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [ProîÂÂle #1] [ProîÂÂle #2] 4.4.2 CPU Ratio Control [Auto] This item allows you to set the ratio between CPU Core Clock and FSB Frequency . The value is adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [06.0]âÂÂ[31.0] 4.4.3 FSB Strap to North Bridge [Auto] When set to [Auto], the FSB Strap will be adjusted automatically by FSB Frequency and DRAM Frequency . Congifuration options: [Auto] [200MHz] [266MHz] [333MHz] The following item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual]. FSB Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the FSB frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 200 to 800. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1333 333 MHz FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The following item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual], [N.O.S.] and [X.M.P .]. PCIE Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the PCIE frequency . The values range from 100 to 150. 4.4.4 DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR2 operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [DDR2-667MHz] [DDR2-800MHz] [DDR2-835MHz] [DDR2-1002MHz] [DDR2-1066MHz] [DDR2-1 1 1 1MHz] [DDR2-133MHz] [DDR2- *1200 MHz*] The DRAM Frequency conîÂÂguration options vary with the FSB Frequency settings. Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. 4.4.5 DRAM Command Rate [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1T] [2T] 4.4.6 DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A/B [Auto] These items are adjustable only when you set the DRAM Command Rate item to [1T] and may help enhancing DRAM stability on 1T mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Advance 175ps] [Advance 150ps] [Advance 125ps] [Advance 100ps] [Advance 75ps] [Advance 50ps] [Advance 25ps] [Normal] [Delay 25ps] [Delay 50ps] [Delay 75ps] [Delay 100ps] [Delay 125ps] [Delay 150ps] [Delay 175ps] 4.4.7 DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A/B [Auto] Adjusting these items may help enhancing DRAM overclocking ability . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Advance 350ps] [Advance 300ps] [Advance 250ps] [Advance 200ps] [Advance 150ps] [Advance 100ps] [Advance 50ps] [Normal] [Delay 50ps] [Delay 100ps] [Delay 150ps] [Delay 200ps] [Delay 250ps] [Delay 300ps] [Delay 350ps] 4.4.8 DRAM Timing Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Manual]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-21 ⢠The following sub-items apprear only when you set the DRAM T iming Control item to [Manual]. ⢠The conîÂÂguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. CAS# Latency [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] [7 DRAM Clocks] RAS# to CAS# Delay [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[17 DRAM Clocks] [18 DRAM Clocks] RAS# Precharge [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[17 DRAM Clocks] [18 DRAM Clocks] RAS# Active T ime [15 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[33 DRAM Clocks] [34 DRAM Clocks] RAS# to RAS# Delay [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Row Refresh Cycle T ime [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [20 DRAM Clocks] [25 DRAM Clocks] [30 DRAM Clocks] [35 DRAM Clocks] [42 DRAM Clocks] Write Recovery Time [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Write to Read Delay [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Read to Precharge T ime [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] 4.4.9 DRAM Static Read Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.4.10 Ai Clock T wister [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM performance. Set this item to [Light] to enhance DRAM compatibility , or [Strong] to enhance DRAM performance. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Moderate] [Light] [Strong]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.1 1 T ransaction Booster [Auto] Allows you to set the system performance. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Relax Level [1] This sub-item appears only when you set the T ransaction Booster item to [Disabled]. Set this item to a higher level to get better compatibility . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. The values range from 1 to 4. Boost Level [1] This sub-item appears only when you set the T ransaction Booster item to [Enabled]. Set this item to a higher level to get better performance. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. The values range from 1 to 8. The following seven items on the next page appear only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and [X.M.P .] and are adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . 4.4.12 CPU V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU VCore voltage. The values range from 0.85000V to 1.70000V with a 0.00625V interval. Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high VCore voltage may damage the CPU permanently , and setting a low VCore voltage may make the system unstable. 4.4.13 CPU PLL V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU PLL voltage. The values range from 1.00V to 2.30V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.14 FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the front side bus termination voltage. The values range from 1.20V to 1.50V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.15 DRAM V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM voltage. The values range from 1.80V to 3.00V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.16 North Bridge V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the North Bridge voltage. The values range from 1.25V to 1.91V with a 0.02V interval.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-23 ⢠Setting the CPU PLL V oltage, FSB T ermination V oltage, DRAM Voltage and North Bridge V oltage to a high level may damage the chipset, memory module, and CPU permanently . Proceed with caution. ⢠Some values of the CPU PLL V oltage, FSB T ermination V oltage, DRAM V oltage and North Bridge V oltage items are labeled in different color , indicating the risk levels of high voltage settings. Refer to the table below for details. ⢠The system may need better cooling system to work stably under high voltage settings. Blue Y ellow Purple Red CPU PLL Voltage 1.50V~1.78V 1.80V~2.00V 2.02V~2.20V 2.22V~2.30V FSB T ermination V oltage 1.20V~1.38V 1.40V~1.50V N/A N/A DRAM V oltage 1.80V~1.86V 1.88V~1.92V 1.94V~2.50V 2.52V~3.00V North Bridge V oltage 1.25V~1.41V 1.43V~1.55V 1.57V~1.73V 1.75V~1.91V 4.4.17 South Bridge V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the South Bridge voltage. The values range from 1.05V to 1.15V with a 0.10V interval. 4.4.18 Clock Over-Charging V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Clock Over-Charging voltage. The values range from 0.70V to 1.00V with a 0.10V interval. The following three items appear only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual], [N.O.S.], and [X.M.P .]. CPU V oltage Damper [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU voltage damper . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU V oltage Reference [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0.63x] [0.615x] [0.65x] [0.67x] North Bridge V oltage Reference [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0.67x] [0.61x] 4.4.19 CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU clock spread spectrum. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.20 PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the PCI Express clock spread spectrum. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-25 4.5 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP USB Conî¿guration Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure CPU. 4.5.1î CPUîÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Conî¿gure advanced CPU settings Manufacturer:Intel Brand String:Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo CPU @ 3.00GHz Frequency :3.00GHz FSB Speed :1333MHz Cache L1 :64 KB Cache L2 :4096 KB CPUID :6F9 Ratio Status:Unlocked (Max:09, Min:06) Ratio Actual Value :9 CPU Ratio Control [Auto] C1E Support [Enabled] CPU TM Function [Enabled] Vanderpool Technology [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(TM) Tech. [Enabled] Options Auto Manual BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Ratio Control [Auto] This item allows you to set the ratio between CPU Core Clock and FSB Frequency . The value is adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [06.0]âÂÂ[31.0] C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable Enhanced Halt State support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU TM Function [Enabled] This function enables the overheated CPU to throttle the clock speed to cool down. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V anderpool T echnology [Enabled] The V anderpool T echnology allows a hardware platform to run multiple operating systems separately and simultaneously , enabling one system to virtually function as several systems. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you set the CPU Ratio Control to [Auto] Intel(R) SpeedStep (TM) T ech. [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], the CPU runs at its default speed. When set to [Enabled], the CPU speed is controlled by the operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-27 4.5.2 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings WARMING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration Conî¿ gure North B ridge features. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced NorthîÂÂBridgeîÂÂConîÂÂguration North Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Control [Auto] PEG Port Force x1 [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Allows you to enabled or disable the remapping of the overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory . Enable this option only when you install 64-bit operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] Allows you to decide which graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI/PEG] [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] This item appears when the PEG Port Control item is set to [Auto]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.3î OnBoardîÂÂDevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Onboard Device Conî¿guraiton High Deî¿nition Audio [Enabled] Front Panel Type [HD Audio] Marvell SATA/PATA Controller [Legacy Mode] Marvell Boot ROM [Enabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN1 [Enabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN2 [Enabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] VIA VT6308S Fireware 1394 [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or Disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced HighîÂÂDeîÂÂnitionî AudioîÂÂ[Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the High DeîÂÂnition Audio. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel T ype [HD Audio] This item appears only when you enable the previous item and allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or high- deîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] Marvell SA T A/P A T A Controller [Legacy Mode] Set this item to RAID Mode to create a RAID set using the EXT_SA T A1-2 connectors and the external SA T A ports. ConîÂÂguration options: [Legacy Mode] [RAID Mode] [Disabled] Marvell Boot ROM [Enabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Legacy Mode] or [RAID Mode]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Please install the Marvell î Controller driver before using the black Serial A T A connectors (EXT_SA T A1-2). Refer to 6.2.4 Make Disk menu for details.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-29 PCIE GigaBit LAN1 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you enable the previous item. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN2 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you enable the previous item. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] VIA VT6308S Firewire 1394 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows the BIOS to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] 4.5.4 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] NO: lets the BIOS conî¿gure all the devices in the system. YES: lets the operating system conî¿gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The USB Devices Enabled item shows auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration USB Devices Enabled: 1 Mouse USB Functions [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Options Disabled Enhanced 4.5.5î USBîÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. USB Functions [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB functions. The following sub-items appear when this item is set to [Enabled]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). This item appears only when you enable the USB 2.0 Controller item. ConîÂÂguration options: [FullSpeed ] [HiSpeed ] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the I/O port 60h/64h emulation support. This item should be enabled for the complete USB keyboard legacy support for non-USB aware OSes. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-31 4.6 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.6.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. ConîÂÂguration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.6.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 speciîÂÂcations. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ] [Enabled] 4.6.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.5î APMîÂÂConîÂÂguration Restore On AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date / RTC Alarm Hour / RTC Alarm Minute / RTC Alarm Second will become user-conîÂÂgurable with set values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI/PCIX Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PCIE devices to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. APM Conî¿guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI/PCIX Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-33 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to disable the Power On by PS/2 keyboard function or set speciîÂÂc keys on the PS/2 keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Temperature v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [47úC/116.5úF] MB Temperature [32úC/89.5úF] CPU Fan Speed [4500RPM] Chassis Fan 1 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed VCORE Voltage [ 1.288V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.296V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.616V] ASUS Advanced Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Proî¿le [Disabled] 4.6.6 Hardware Monitor CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows [N/A]. Chassis Fan 1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed and power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows [N/A]. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select [Ignored] if you do not want to detect this item.
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPUîÂÂFanîÂÂProîÂÂle item appears when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control feature. CPUîÂÂFanîÂÂProîÂÂleîÂÂ[Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the chassis Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis Fan Ratio and Chassis T arget T emperature items appear when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the fan speed ratio so that the fans operate at a low CPU temperature. Setting a very low ratio may cause a dramatical fan speed drop and trigger a hardware monitor warning message. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] Chassis T arget T emperature [37úC] The CPU fan speed will be adjusted to maintain the CPU temperature as low as the selected temperature. ConîÂÂguration options: [28úC] [31úC] [34úC] [37úC] [40úC] [43úC] [46úC] [28úC] [31úC] [34úC] [37úC] [40úC] [43úC] [46úC]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-35 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [xxx Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] [Hard Drive] [A T API CD-ROM] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the availabe devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7.2î BootîÂÂSettingsîÂÂConîÂÂguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2 ⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] W aitîÂÂforîÂÂâÂÂF1â îÂÂIfîÂÂErrorîÂÂ[Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] HitîÂÂâÂÂDEL â îÂÂMessageîÂÂDisplayîÂÂ[Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-37 Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 3.2 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. 4.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Security Settings Supervisor Password :Not Installed User Password :Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password :Installed User Password :Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-39 4.8 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîÂÂgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS O.C. Proî¿le Ai Net 2 Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update BIOS. This utility doesn't support : 1.NTFS format 4.8.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Ok] or [Cancel], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. Please see section 4.1.3 for details. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.06 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: WINBOND W25P/X16 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit
4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.8.2î ASUSîÂÂO.C.îÂÂProîÂÂle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. SaveîÂÂtoîÂÂProîÂÂeîÂÂ1/2 Allows you to save the current BIOS îÂÂle to the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to save the îÂÂle. LoadîÂÂfromîÂÂProîÂÂleîÂÂ1/2 Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the îÂÂle. StartîÂÂO.C.îÂÂProîÂÂle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility . ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V1.06 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îÂÂash disk or a îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure! Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status :Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status :Not Installed Save to Proî¿le 1 Load from Proî¿le 1 Save to Proî¿le 2 Load from Proî¿le 2 Start O.C. Proî¿le Save to Proî¿le 1 BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-41 POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST . When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the faults or shorts are detected. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.8.3 Ai Net 2 This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cables connected to the LAN (RJ-45) ports. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Ai Net 2 Pair Status Length 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.9 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter provides information on how to conîÂÂgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. Chapter 5 RAIDîÂÂconî¿guration
5-2 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.1î RAIDîÂÂconî¿gurations The motherboard comes with two RAID controllers that allow you to conîÂÂgure Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. ⢠The Intel î ICH9R Southbridge RAID includes a high performance SA T A RAID controller that supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 for six independent Serial A T A channels. ⢠Marvell î 88SE6145 RAID . Enabled by Marvell î 88SE6145 controller , the Marvell î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to external hard disk drives or port-multiplier devices. 5.1.1î RAIDîÂÂdeîÂÂnitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10* conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. Intel î Matrix Storage . The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH9R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10* function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk for details.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-3 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to th e Ma in Men u, se le ct SA T A îÂÂC onî gur ati on , t he n p res s <E nte r>. 3. Select the item Co nîÂÂg ure îÂÂSA TA îÂÂas , then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RA ID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A as item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
5-4 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.2 Marvel î 88SE6145 RAID BIOS î Conî¿gurationîÂÂUtility The Marvell î 88SE6145 RAID BIOS ConîÂÂguration utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, or RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Marvell î RAID BIOS ConîÂÂguration utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives at Red SA T A Connector . 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility main menu. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is deî¿ned! Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 4. Press <Enter> and select a desired adapter for RAID conîÂÂguration. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit S e l e c t A d a p t e r Adapter 2 [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Adapter 1
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-5 5.2.1 Creating a RAID set T o create a RAID set: 1. From the utility menu bar , select Create on the top. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is deî¿ned! Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 2. Press <Enter>. The screen shows the disks you can add to make up the RAID set. Use the arrow key to select a disk and press <Enter> or <Space> to include this disk in the array . Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 3. After you have selected the desired disks, select NEXT to create array .
5-6 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 4. The Create Array screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT 5. Use the arrow key to select the RAID Level item and press <Enter> to display the available RAID set. Select a RAID set and press <Enter> to create. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT *RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 RAID5 ⢠The available RAID sets vary with the number of disks you select. The RAID sets that you are not allowed to create are grayed out. ⢠Except for the RAID Level item, we recommend you keep the default values for the other items in Create Array screen.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-7 6. A conîÂÂrmation screen appears. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm the array creation. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Create the array?[Y] Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT 7. The newly created array appears in Arrays Information. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FULLASSIGN 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FULLASSIGN 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete]
5-8 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.2.2 Deleting an array T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility menu bar , select Delete on the top and press <Enter> and the Delete array screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 2. Select a desired array to delete and select NEXT. Press <Y> after the conîÂÂrmation screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Delete the array?[Y] Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members *0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] NEXT
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-9 3. Press <Y> again to conîÂÂrm and delete the selected array . Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Warning: Do you want to delete the array's MBR?[Y] Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members *0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] NEXT Y ou cannot recover lost data if you delete an array . Make sure you back up important data before deleting an array .
5-10 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o enter the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The utility supports maxium four hard disk drives for RAID conîÂÂgurration.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-1 1 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0 (Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. Highlight the Disks item, then press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. The SELECT DISKS screen appears. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Spacebar> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k 1 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k 2 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-12 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 7. Highlight the Capacity item, enter the desired RAID volume capacity , then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. When the Create V olume item is highlighted, press <Enter>. A warning message appears. 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Array menu. A lower stripe size is recommended for server systems. A higher stripe size is recommended for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB..
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-13 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1 (Mirror) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 5 and 7 to 9 of the previous section to create the RAID 1 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-14 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10 (RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 10 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-15 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5, then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 5 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v5.6.2.1002 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-16 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! A re y ou su re yo u wa n t to d e le te vo lu me âÂÂV ol u m eX âÂÂ? ( Y /N ): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v 5. 0. 0.1 032 ICH9R w RA ID 5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] D e l e t i n g a v o lu m e w i l l d e st r oy t h e v o l u m e d a ta on t h e d r iv e (s ) a n d c a u s e a n y m e m be r d i s k s t o b e co m e a v a i l a b l e a s n on - R A I D d is k s. W A R N I N G : EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-17 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID T ake caution before you reset a RAID volume hard disk drive to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume hard disk drive deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] R e s e t t i n g R A I D d a t a w i l l r e m o v e i n t e r n a l R A I D s t r u c t u r e s f r o m t h e se le c t e d R A I D d i s k s . B y r e m o v i n g t h e s e s t r u c t u r e s , the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB M e m b e r D i s k 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete 5.3.7 Rebuilding the RAID This option is only for the RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 10 level. Rebuilding the RAID with other non-RAID disk: 1. If one member of physical SA T A Hard disk within the array is off-line or failed, the status of array will become to be degraded from normal. The following displays as:
5-18 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 2. Press <Ctrl-I> to enter the Intel Matrix Storage Manager RAID conîÂÂguration utility after POST . 3. If there is available Non-RAID SA T A Hard Disk, the utility will prompt the windows for rebuilding the RAID. Press <Enter> to select the port of destination disk for rebuilding or press <ESC> to exit The size of destination disk for rebuilding should be the same or bigger as the original hard disk. 4. After selecting, the volumes with Rebuild status will be rebuilt within the operating system. 5. Exit the SA T A RAID utility . When operating system is running, select the Intel Matrix Storage Console from the Start Menu or click the Intel Matrix Storage Manager tray icon. 6. From the View menu, select Advanced Mode to display a detailed view of the Intel Matrix Storage Console. 7. From the V olumes view in the device pane, select the RAID volume. The status will display Rebuilding % complete. After the rebuild is complete, the status will display Normal.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-19 Rebuilding the RAID with new installed disk: 1. If one member of physical SA T A Hard disk within the array is off-line or failed, the status of array will become to be degraded from normal. The following displays as. 2. Remove the failed SA T A hard disk and install the same speciîÂÂcation of new SA T A hard disk into the same SA T A Port. After reboot, the rebuild will occur automatically . The size of new disk for rebuilding should be the same or bigger as the original hard disk. 3. After selecting, the volumes with Rebuild status will be rebuilt within the operating system. 4. Exit the SA T A RAID utility . When the operating system is running, select the Intel Matrix Storage Console from the Start Menu or click the Intel Matrix Storage Manager tray icon. 5. From the View menu, select Advanced Mode to display a detailed view of the Intel Matrix Storage Console. 6. From the V olumes view in the device pane, select the RAID volume. The status will display Rebuilding % complete. After the rebuild is complete, the status will display Normal.
5-20 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.8 Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5.3.9 Setting the Boot array use MB BIOS Setup Utility 1. When creating multi-raid via Intel(r) Matrix Storage Manager RAID, we would like to assign one array to be the boot drive. The following shows as the status of current arrays: 2. Re-boot the system and press <Del> to enter the Motherboard BIOS Setup Utility during POST . 3. Go to [Boot] menu âÂÂ> [Boot Device Priority]. Then, select the desired boot array and use < > or <-> key to change the boot device priority . Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-21 5.3.10 Global Array Manager Y ou may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. 4. Exit the BIOS Setup Utility and save the changes. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Drive] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
5-22 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter provides information on how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone workstation supports. Chapter 6 Driver installation
6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. For Windows î Vista operating system, use either a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB device with the RAID driver . 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID/SA T A driver disk without entering the OS 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support DVD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. 6.1.2 Creating a RAID/SA T A driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î environment 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support DVD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then select the RAID driver disk you wish to create: ⢠Click Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 32bit Driver to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 32-bit system. ⢠Click Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 64bit Driver to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 64-bit system. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk/USB device into the îÂÂoppy disk drive/USB port. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-3 6.1.3 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows î XP OS T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î XP OS 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î XP installation CD. The Windows î XP Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message â Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ... â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device. S=Specify Additional Device ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter. Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices(s): <none> * To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives, or special disk controllers for use with Windows, including those for which you have a device support disk from a mass storage device manufacturer, press S. * If you do not have any device support disks from a mass storage device manufacturer, or do not want to specify additional mass storage devices for use with Windows, press ENTER. 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îÂÂoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. ENTER=Continue ESC=Cancel F3=Exit Windows Setup Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk into Drive A: * Press ENTER when ready.
6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. Marvell 6145 SA T A Controller Select Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller 32bit Driver for 32bit Windows Server OS, Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller 64bit Driver for 64bit Windows Server OS, Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller V ista 32bit Driver for 32bit Windows Vista OS, or Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller Vista 64bit Driver for 64bit Windows Vista OS, and then press <Enter>. ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup You have chosen to conî¿gure a SCSI Adapter for use with Windows, using a device support disk provided by an adapter manufacturer. Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen. Marvell 61xx SATA Controller 32bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller 64bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller Vista 32bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller Vista 64bit Driver Intel Matrix Storage Select Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH) for Intel Matrix Storage RAID mode from the list, then press <Enter>. If you conîÂÂgured SA T A as AHCI Mode in the BIOS setup utility of IDE ConîÂÂguration, îÂÂrst install the Intel SA T A AHCI Driver during windows setup. Then, select the Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SA T A AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH) from the list. Refer to section 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk to create the Intel SA T A Driver for windows system. ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup You have chosen to conî¿gure a SCSI Adapter for use with Windows, using a device support disk provided by an adapter manufacturer. Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen. Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH6R) Intel(R) 82801FR SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH6R) Intel(R) 82801FBM SATA AHCI Controller (Mobile ICH6M) Intel(R) 82801ER SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH5R) Intel(R) 6300ESB SATA RAIID Controller
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-5 6. The Windows î Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue. 6.1.4 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î XP/64-bit XP/Vista/64-bit V ista operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . Windows î Vista OS T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î Vista OS 1. Insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 2. During the OS installation, select Load Driver , click Browse , then select Floppy Disk Drive (A:) . Click OK . 3. Select Intel ICH9R and click Next. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. Click an item to install 6.2 Support DVD information The support DVD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support DVD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www .asus.com) for updates. 6.2.1 Running the support DVD Place the support DVD to the optical drive. The DVD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click an icon to display support DVD/motherboard information
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-7 6.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll - Installation Wizard for Drivers Installs all of the drivers through the Installation Wizard. Intel(R) Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î chipset Inf update program. Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC 888 audio driver and application. USB 2.0 Driver Installs the Universal Serial Bus 2.0 (USB 2.0) driver .
6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS InstAll-Installation Wizard for Utilities Installs all of the utilities through the Installation Wizard. ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS AI Suite Installs the ASUS AI Suite. Click to display the next page Click to return to the previous page
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-9 ASUS Update Allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. Adobe Acrobat Reader V7.0 Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view , and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX 9.0c Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0 driver . The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0 is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sound. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of you computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Visit the Microsoft website (www .microsoft.com) for updates. WinDVD Copy5 T rial DVD Copy5 T rial Installs the InterVideo DVD Copy5 trial version. InterVideo MediaOne Gallery Installs the media library and all-in-one software. Ulead PhotoImpact 12 SE Installs the PhotoImpact image editing software. CyberLink PowerBackup Installs CyberLink PowerBackup to back up and restore your data easily . CorelîÂÂSnapîÂÂreîÂÂPlusîÂÂSE Installs Corel SnapîÂÂre Plus SE. Anti-Virus Utility The anti-virus application detects and protects your computer from viruses that destroys data.
6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.4 Make Disk menu The Make Disk menu contains items to create Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk/ Marvell î 61xx P A T A/eSA T A driver disk. Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 32bit/64bit Driver Allows you to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make Marvell 61xx P A T A/eSA T A Driver Allows you to create a Marvell î 61xx P A T A/eSA T A driver disk.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-11 6.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Most user manual îÂÂles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual îÂÂle. 6.2.6 ASUS Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support DVD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard. Browse this DVD Displays the support DVD contents in graphical format.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-13 T echnical support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support DVD and a brief description of each in text format.
6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3 Software information Most of the applications in the Support DVD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 6.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the Support DVD. See section 6.2.3 Utilities menu for details. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo2⢠1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next . The ASUS MyLogo window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility . ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section 4.7.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration . ⢠Y ou can create your own boot logo image in GIF îÂÂle format. ⢠The îÂÂle size should be smaller than 150 K.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-15 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.2î AudioîÂÂconîÂÂgurations The Realtek î audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The CODEC also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek î Audio Driver from the support CD/DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager A. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows Vista⢠Control settings window ConîÂÂgurationî option tabs Information button Exit button Minimize button Device advanced settings Connector settings Analog and digital connector status Set default device button
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-17 Device advanced settings Click Device advanced settings to show further settings for the playback and recording device. Information Click the Information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. Connector settings Click the Connector Settings button ( ) to show further settings for the analog/digital output/input ports. Exit Click the Exit button or the OK button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager . ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings. The ConîÂÂguration options shown in this section are for reference purposes only and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. In the Windows Vista⢠environment, Realtek HD Audio Manager automatically detects devices connected to the analog/digital ports and shows corresponding conîÂÂguration options tabs.
6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation Digital Output The Realtek î audio CODEC allows you to connect an external audio output device via the coaxial/digital S/PDIF port. Y ou can set your listening environment, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the digital output options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Digital Output tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the digital output port as the default audio output device. 3. Click the Sound Effects sub-tab for options on changing the acoustic environment and karaoke settings, or click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio output format. 4. Click to effect the Digital Output settings and exit. Speakers The Speakers tab allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output settings using the analog audio ports. T o set the speakers options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Speakers tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the analog ports as the default audio output device. 3. Click the SpeakerîÂÂConîÂÂguration sub-tab for audio channel options and test. 4. Click the Sound Effects sub-tab for options on changing the acoustic environment and karaoke settings. 5. Click the Room Correction sub-tab for individual speaker distance adjustment. 6. Click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio output format. 7. Click to effect the Speakers settings and exit.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-19 Line In The Line In tab allows you to conîÂÂgure audio input settings using the analog line in port. T o set the analog line in options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Line In tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the analog line in port as the default audio input device. 3. The Line In tab allows you to adjust the recording and playback volume and set a default format for audio input. 4. Click to effect the Line In settings and exit. Microphone The Microphone tab allows you to conîÂÂgure the audio input settings using the analog microphone port and to check if your microphone device is connected properly . T o set the Microphone options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. In the Microphone Effects sub- tab, click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. Click the Beam Forming option button to eliminate surrounding noise interferences. 3. Click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio input format. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit.
6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation Control settings window ConîÂÂgurationî options Information button Exit button Minimize button B. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows XP⢠Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window . Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager .
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-21 Sound Effect The Realtek î audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer , set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the sound effect options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Sound Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer , or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Ef fect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. T o set the mixer options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Mixer tab. 2. T urn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volu me. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set all channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to W ave, SW Synth, Front, Rear , CD volume, Mic volume, Line V olume, and Stereo mix, etc. by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. Click the next button ( ) to display more menu options. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit. ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings.
6-22 Chapter 6: Driver installation Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings. T o set the Audio I/O options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel conîÂÂguration. 3. The con trol set tings window d isplays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit Microphone The Microphone option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly . T o set the Microphone options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click the Beam Forming option button to eliminate surrounding noise interferences. Click to start microphone calibration. 5. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-23 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. T o start the 3D Audio Demo 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the 3D Audio Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
6-24 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.3 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer âÂÂs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the Support DVD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the Support DVD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Probe II main window allows you to view the current status of your system and change the utility conîÂÂguration. By default, the main window displays the Preference section. Y ou can close or restore the Preference section by clicking on the triangle on the main window right handle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-25 Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the main window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Preference Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
6-26 Chapter 6: Driver installation Changing the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic effect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group, click the horseshoe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer âÂÂs desktop. Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the monitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Y ou cannot adjust the sensor threshold values in a small monitoring panel.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-27 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This browser displays various Windowsî management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
6-28 Chapter 6: Driver installation PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available HDD space. Memory usage The Memory tab shows both used and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser .
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-29 ConîÂÂguringîÂÂPCîÂÂProbeîÂÂII Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables you to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor threshold values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values for each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration CPU usage The CPU tab displays real- time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors.
6-30 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.4 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch AI Gear 2, AI N.O.S., AI Booster , AI Nap, and Q-Fan 2 utilities easily . Installing AI Suite T o install AI Suite on your computer: 1. Place the support DVD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click AI Suite . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching AI Suite Y ou can launch the AI Suite right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the AI Suite from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx.xx . The AI Suite main window appears. After launching the application, the AI Suite icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using AI Suite Click the AI N.O.S., AI Gear 2, AI Nap, AI Booster , or Q-Fan 2 icon to launch the utility , or click the Normal icon to restore the system to normal state. Press to launch AI Gear 2 Press to launch AI Nap Pres s to la unch AI N.O.S. Press to launch Q-Fan 2 Pr ess to l aun ch A I Bo ost er Press to restore to normal
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-31 Other feature buttons Click on right corner of the main window to open the monitor window . Click on right corner of the expanded window to switch the temperature from degrees Centigrade to degrees Fahrenheit. Displays the CPU/ system temperature, CPU/memory/PCIE voltage, and CPU/ chassis fan speed Displays the FSB/CPU frequency
6-32 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.5 ASUS AI Gear 2 ASUS AI Gear 2 provides four system performance options that allows you to select the best performance setting for your computing needs. This easy-to-use utility adjusts the processor frequency and vCore voltage to minimize system noise and power consumption. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch AI Gear 2 by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on your Windows OS taskbar and then click the AI Gear 2 button on the AI Suite main window . Shift the gear to the performance setting that you like. Maximum Performance Medium Performance High Performance Maximum Power Saving
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-33 6.3.6 ASUS AI Nap This feature allows you to minimize the power consumption of your computer whenever you are away . Enable this feature for minimum power consumption and a quieter system operation. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI Nap button on the AI Suite main window . Click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o exit AI Nap mode, press the system power or mouse button then click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o switch the power button functions from AI Nap to shutting down, just right click the AI Suite icon on the OS taskbar , select AI Nap and click Use power button . Unclick the the item to switch the function back.
6-34 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.7 ASUS AI N.O.S. This ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI N.O.S. button on the AI Suite main window . drop-down menu button select an N.O.S. mode Click the drop-down menu button and select Disable or Manual. Click Apply at the bottom to save the conîÂÂguration.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-35 6.3.8 ASUS Q-Fan 2 This ASUS Q-Fan 2 Control feature allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan 2 or the Chassis Q-Fan 2 for more efîÂÂcient system operation. After enabling the Q-Fan 2 function, the fans can be set to automatically adjust depending on the temperature, to decrease fan speed, or to achieve the maximum fan speed. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the Q-Fan 2 button on the AI Suite mAIn window . Click the drop-down menu button and display the fan names. Select CPU Q-Fan or CHASSIS Q-Fan . Click the Enabled box to activate this function. drop-down list button Enable Q-Fan 2 box ProîÂÂle list appears after clicking the Enabled box. Click the drop-down list button and select a proîÂÂle. Optimal mode makes the fans adjust speed with the temperature; Silent mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation; Performance mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect. click to display the drop- down list and select a Q-Fan 2 mode Click Apply at the bottom to save the setup.
6-36 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.9 ASUS AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in WIndows î environment without the hassle of booting the BIOS. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the AI Booster button on the AI Suite main window . The options on the taskbar allow you to use the default settings, adjust CPU/ Memory/PCI-E frequency manually , or create and apply your personal overclocking conîÂÂgurations.
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This section provides information about the CPU features and technologies and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone workstation. Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information A-2 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Visit www .microsoft.com for more information on Windows î 64-bit OS. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Intel î processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î Vista, Windows î XP SP2 / Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions) Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î Vista 64-bit Edition or Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support DVD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . Refer to the expansion card or add-on device(s) documentation, or visit the related website, to verify if the card/device supports a 64-bit system.
A-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. T urn on the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu, highlight CPUîÂÂConîÂÂguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Enabled], and then press <Enter>. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Properties window . 8. On the Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click Apply, then click OK. 10. Close the Display Properties window . After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low . The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
Appendix: Reference information A-4 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentiumî LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows î Vista/XP and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www .intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to [Enabled]. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper- Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 A.4î SimpleîÂÂî¿xes Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself. Problem Action The power LED on the workstation or on the monitor do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Ensure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not perform power- on self tests (POST) after it was turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Ensure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The system continuously beeps after it was turned on. 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Ensure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not available 1. Ensure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Ensure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information A-6
ii Copyright é 2008 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). ASUS provides this manual âÂÂas isâ without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or îÂÂtness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, ofîÂÂcers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of proîÂÂts, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product. SpeciîÂÂcations and information contained in this manual ae furnished for informational use only , and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it. Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modiîÂÂed or altered, unless such repair , modiîÂÂcation of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identiîÂÂcation or explanation and to the ownersâ beneîÂÂt, without intent to infringe. E3822 First Edition May 2008
iii Contents Contents ...................................................................................................... iii Notices ....................................................................................................... viii Safety information ...................................................................................... ix About this guide .......................................................................................... x Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 System package contents ........................................................... 1-2 1.2 Serial number label ...................................................................... 1-2 1.3î SystemîÂÂspeciîÂÂcations ................................................................. 1-3 1.4 Front panel features ..................................................................... 1-5 1.5 Rear panel features ...................................................................... 1-6 1.6 Internal features ........................................................................... 1-7 1.7 LED information ........................................................................... 1-8 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs ............................................................ 1-8 1.7.2 LAN (RJ-45) LEDs .......................................................... 1-8 Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2.1 Chassis cover ............................................................................... 2-2 2.1.1 Removing the left side cover ........................................... 2-2 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover ........................................ 2- 3 2.2 Motherboard overview ................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................... 2-5 2.3.1 Installing the CPU ........................................................... 2-5 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink ............................................. 2-8 2.4 System memory ......................................................................... 2-10 2.4.1 Overview ....................................................................... 2-10 2.4.2 Memory conîÂÂgurations ................................................... 2-1 1 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM .......................................................... 2-12 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ........................................................ 2-12 2.5 Installing hard disk drives ......................................................... 2-13 2.6 Installing 5.25-inch drives ......................................................... 2-15 2.6.1 Removing the front panel cover .................................... 2-15 2.6.2 Installing an additional optical drive .............................. 2-16 2.7 Expansion cards ........................................................................ 2-19 2.7.1 Installing expansion cards ............................................. 2-19 2.7.2 ConîÂÂguring an expansion card ..................................... 2-20
iv Contents 2.7.3 Interrupt assignments ................................................... 2-2 1 2.8 Removing components ............................................................. 2-22 2.8.1 Removing the îÂÂoppy disk drive ..................................... 2-22 2.8.2 Removing the system fan ............................................. 2-2 3 2.8.3 Removing the SA T A backplane ..................................... 2-24 2.9 Connecting cables ..................................................................... 2-26 Chapter 3: Motherboard info 3.1 Motherboard layouts .................................................................... 3-2 3.2 Jumpers ........................................................................................ 3-6 3.3 Connectors ................................................................................... 3-8 3.3.1 Rear panel connectors .................................................... 3-8 3.3.2 Internal connectors ........................................................ 3-1 1 Chapter 4: BIOS infomation 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ............................................ 4-2 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility ........................................................ 4-2 4.1.2 Creating a bootable îÂÂoppy disk ....................................... 4-5 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility ................................................... 4-6 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility ................................................................ 4-7 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility ...................................... 4- 9 4.2 BIOS setup program .................................................................. 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ......................................................... 4-1 1 4.2.2 Menu bar ........................................................................ 4-1 1 4.2.3 Navigation keys .............................................................. 4-1 1 4.2.4 Menu items ................................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ............................................................ 4-12 4.2.6 ConîÂÂguration îÂÂelds ....................................................... 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ............................................................. 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar ....................................................................... 4-12 4.2.9 General help ................................................................. 4-12 4.3 Main menu .................................................................................. 4-13 4.3.1 System T ime ................................................................. 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ................................................................. 4-1 3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.4 Language ...................................................................... 4-13
v Contents 4.3.5 S A T A 1 ~ 6 . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 4 - 1 4 4.3.6 SA T A ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-15 4.3.7 AHCI ConîÂÂguration ....................................................... 4-16 4.3.8 System Information ....................................................... 4-17 4.4 Ai T weaker menu ........................................................................ 4-18 4.4.1 Ai Overclock T uner ....................................................... 4-18 4.4.2 CPU Ratio Control ....................................................... 4-1 9 4.4.3 FSB Strap to North Bridge ........................................... 4-19 4.4.4 DRAM Frequency ........................................................ 4-20 4.4.5 DRAM Command Rate ................................................ 4-20 4.4.6 DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A/B ............................. 4-20 4.4.7 DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A/B ............................... 4-20 4.4.8 DRAM T iming Control .................................................. 4-20 4.4.9 DRAM Static Read Control .......................................... 4-21 4.4.10 Ai Clock T wister ............................................................ 4-2 1 4.4.1 1 T ransaction Booster ..................................................... 4-22 4.4.12 CPU V oltage ............................................................... 4-22 4.4.13 CPU PLL V oltage ......................................................... 4-22 4.4.14 FSB T ermination V oltage .............................................. 4-22 4.4.15 DRAM V oltage ............................................................. 4-22 4.4.16 North Bridge V oltage .................................................... 4-22 4.4.17 South Bridge V oltage ................................................... 4-23 4.4.18 Clock Over-Charging V oltage ...................................... 4-2 3 4.4.19 CPU Spread Spectrum ................................................ 4-2 3 4.4.20 PCIE Spread Spectrum ................................................ 4-24 4.5 Advanced menu ......................................................................... 4-25 4.5.1 CPU ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-25 4.5.2 Chipset .......................................................................... 4-27 4.5.3 OnBoard Devices ConîÂÂguration ................................... 4-2 8 4.5.4 PCI PnP ........................................................................ 4-29 4.5.5 USB ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-30 4.6 Power menu ................................................................................ 4-31 4.6.1 Suspend Mode ............................................................. 4-31 4.6.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ........................................ 4-31 4.6.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .......................................................... 4-31
vi Contents 4.6.4 ACPI APIC Support ....................................................... 4-31 4.6.5 APM ConîÂÂguration ........................................................ 4-32 4.6.6 Hardware Monitor ......................................................... 4-3 3 4.7 Boot menu .................................................................................. 4-35 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority ...................................................... 4-35 4.7.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration .......................................... 4-36 4.7.3 Security ......................................................................... 4-37 4.8 T ools menu ................................................................................. 4-39 4.8.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 .......................................................... 4-39 4.8.2 ASUS O.C. ProîÂÂle ......................................................... 4-40 4.8.3 Ai Net 2 ......................................................................... 4-41 4.9 Exit menu .................................................................................... 4-42 ChapterîÂÂ5:î RAIDîÂÂconîÂÂguratio n 5.1î RAIDîÂÂconîÂÂgurations .................................................................... 5-2 5.1.1 RAID deîÂÂnitions .............................................................. 5-2 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives ................................................ 5-3 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS ........................................ 5-3 5.2 Marvel î îÂÂ88SE6145îÂÂRAIDîÂÂBIOSîÂÂConîÂÂgurationîÂÂUtility ................. 5-4 5.2.1 Creating a RAID set ........................................................ 5-5 5.2.2 Deleting an array ............................................................. 5-8 5.3 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility ................. 5-10 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) ....................................... 5-1 1 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) ...................................... 5-13 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) ....................... 5-14 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) ...................................... 5-15 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set ...................................................... 5-16 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID ........................................ 5-17 5.3.7 Rebuilding the RAID ..................................................... 5-1 7 5.3.8 Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager .................... 5-20 5.3.9 Setting the Boot array use MB BIOS Setup Utility ........ 5-20 5.3.10 Global Array Manager ................................................... 5-21 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation ............................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS ...... 6-2
vii 6.1.2 Creating a RAID/SA T A driver disk in Windows î .............. 6-2 6.1.3 Installing the RAID controller driver ................................ 6- 3 6.1.4 Installing an operating system ........................................ 6-5 6.2 Support DVD information ............................................................ 6-6 6.2.1 Running the support DVD ............................................... 6-6 6.2.2 Drivers menu ................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Utilities menu .................................................................. 6- 8 6.2.4 Make Disk menu ........................................................... 6-10 6.2.5 Manual menu ................................................................. 6-1 1 6.2.6 ASUS Contact information ............................................. 6-1 1 6.2.7 Other information .......................................................... 6-12 6.3 Software information ................................................................. 6-14 6.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠......................................................... 6-14 6.3.2 Audio conîÂÂgurations ..................................................... 6-16 6.3.3 ASUS PC Probe II ......................................................... 6-24 6.3.4 ASUS AI Suite ............................................................... 6-30 6.3.5 ASUS AI Gear 2 ............................................................ 6-32 6.3.6 ASUS AI Nap ................................................................ 6-3 3 6.3.7 ASUS AI N.O.S. ............................................................ 6-34 6.3.8 ASUS Q-Fan 2 .............................................................. 6-35 6.3.9 ASUS AI Booster ........................................................... 6-36 Appendix: Reference information A.1 Intel î EM64T .................................................................................. A-2 Using the Intel î EM64T feature ...................................................... A- 2 A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST) ........................ A-2 A.2.1 System requirements ...................................................... A- 2 A.2.2 Using the EIST ................................................................ A-3 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................... A-4 Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology ........................................ A- 4 A.4î SimpleîÂÂîÂÂxes ..................................................................................A-5 Contents
viii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. W ARNING! The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modiîÂÂcations to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âÂÂs authority to operate this equipment. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Th is cla ss B di git al ap pa rat us com pl ie s w ith C an adi an ICE S- 00 3. This symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products.
ix Safety information Electrical Safety ⢠Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged. ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system, contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your dealer . Ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you service. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to îÂÂx it by yourself. Contact a qualiîÂÂed service technician or your dealer . Operation Safety ⢠Servicing of this product or units is to be performed by trained service personnel only . ⢠Before operating the server , carefully read all the manuals included with the server package. ⢠Before using the server , make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If any damage is detected, contact your dealer as soon as possible. ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Place the server on a stable surface. This product is equipped with a three-wire power cable and plug for the user âÂÂs safety . Use the power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock. Lithium-Ion Battery W arning CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer . Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer âÂÂs instructions. CD-ROM Drive Safety W arning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Heavy System CAUTION! This server system is heavy . Ask for assistance when moving or carrying the system.
x About this guide Audience This user guide is intended for system integrators and experienced users with at least basic knowledge of conîÂÂguring a workstation. Contents This guide contains the following parts: 1. Chapter 1: Product Introduction This chapter describes the general features of the workstation, including sections on front panel and rear panel speciîÂÂcations. 2. Chapter 2: Hardware setup This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. 3. Chapter 3: Motherboard information This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the workstation. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. 4. Chapter 4: BIOS information This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. 5.î ChapterîÂÂ5:îÂÂRAIDîÂÂconîÂÂguration This chapter provides information on how to conîÂÂgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. 6. Chapter 6: Driver installation This chapter provides information on how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone workstation supports. 7. Appendix: Reference information This section provides information about the CPU features and technologies and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone workstation.
xi Reference Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details. W ARNING : Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION : Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE : T ips and information to aid in completing a task. Conventions T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.
xii
1- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter describes the general features of the workstation, including sections on front panel and rear panel speciîÂÂcations. Chapter 1 Product introduction
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-2 If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . 1.1 System package contents Check your system package for the following items. Model Name TW300-E5/PI4 Chassis ASUS T10 Pedestal Chassis Motherboard ASUS P5E WS Professional Component 1 x 450W Single Power Supply 1 x 95mm System Fan 5 x SA T A Cables 1 x 7-in-1 Card Reader 4 x Internal HDD trays 1 x Front I/O Board Accessories 1 x ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 UserâÂÂs Guide 1 x TW300-E5/PI4 Support CD 1 x Bag of Screws 1 x AC Power Cable 1 x CPU Heatsink Optional Items - 1.2 Serial number label Before requesting support from the ASUS T echnical Support team, you must take note of the productâÂÂs serial number containing 12 characters such as xxxxxxxxxxxx. See the îÂÂgure below . With the correct serial number of the product, ASUS T echnical Support team members can then offer a quicker and satisfying solution to your problems. xxxxxxxxxxxx TW300-E5/PI4
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-3 1.3î SystemîÂÂspeciî¿cations The ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 is a workstation featuring the ASUS P5E WS Professional motherboard. The workstation supports Intelî LGA775 Core⢠2 Extreme / Core⢠2 Quad / Core⢠2 Duo processors with EM64T technology , plus other latest technologies through the chipsets onboard. (continued on the next page) Model Name TW300-E5/PI4 Processor / System Bus 1 x Socket LGA775 Quad-core: Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme QX9000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme QX6000 Series Intel î Core⢠2 Quad Q9000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Quad Q6000 Series Dual-core: Intel î Core⢠2 Duo E8000 Series (45nm) Intel î Core⢠2 Duo E6000 Series FSB 1333 / 1066 / 800 MHz with EM64T Core Logic Intel î X38 MCH Intel î ICH9R PCI-X NEC upd720404 ASUS Features Q Fan â Memory T otal Slots 4 (Dual-Channel) Capacity Maximum up to 8GB Memory T ype DDR2 800 / 667 ECC and Non-ECC, Unbuffered Memory Size 512MB, 1GB, and 2GB Expansion Slots T otal PCI/PCI- X/PCI-E Slots 6 Slot T ype 2 x PCIe x16 Gen2 slots (x16 link) 1 x PCIe x1 slot (x1 link) 1 x PCI-X 64bit/133MHz slot 2 x PCI 32-bit / 33MHz slots (5V) Storage SA T A Controller 6 x SA T AII 300MB/s ports Intel î ICH9R: Intel Matrix Storage (for Windows only) - Supports software RAID 0, 1, 5 and 10 Marvell 88SE6145 SA T A Controller: - Supports software RAID 0, 1, 5, and 10 (for Windows) - Supports software RAID 0, 1, and 10 (for Linux) HDD Bays I = internal A or S will be hot-swappable 4 x Internal SA T AII HDD Bays
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-4 Networking LAN 2 x Marvell î 8056 PCI-E GbE LANs Auxiliary Storage FDD / CD / DVD 1 x 7-in-1 Card Reader 2 x 5.25â Optical Drives (Options: 16X DVD-ROM / DVD-RW) Graphic VGA Graphic Add-on Card ConîÂÂguration Option: Option 1: Professional 2D - NVIDIA Quadro NVS290 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) Option 2: Entry 3D - NVIDIA Quadro FX370 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) - NVIDIA Quadro FX570 (256 MB, up to 2 cards) Option 3: Mid-range 3D - NVIDIA Quadro FX 1700 (512 MB, up to 2 cards) Onboard I/O 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 2 x RJ-45 ports 1 x S/PDIF Out port (Coaxial Optical) 8 x USB 2.0 ports (Front x 2, Rear x 6) 2 x eSA T A ports 1 x IEEE1394a port 6 x Audio ports OS Support Genuine Windows î XP Professional 32 / 64-bit Genuine Windows î Vista Business 32 / 64-bit Anti-virus Software Norton î Internet Security 2007 (T rial Version) Dimension (HH x WW x DD) 441mm x 207mm x 517mm Net Weight Kg (CPU, DRAM & HDD not inclu ded) 16 Kg Power Supply 450W Single Power Supply Environment Operation temperature: 10ðC~35ðC Non operation temperature: -40ðC~70ðC Non operation humidity: 20%~90% (Non- condensing) *SpeciîÂÂcationsîÂÂareîÂÂsubjectîÂÂtoîÂÂchangeîÂÂwithoutîÂÂnotice.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-5 1.4 Front panel features The barebone server displays a simple yet stylish front panel with easily accessible features. The power and reset buttons, LED indicators, optical drive, and two USB ports are located on the front panel. The drive bays, power and reset buttons, LED indicators, CD/DVD-ROM drive, îÂÂoppy drive, and USB 2.0 ports are located on the front panel. For future installation of 5.25-inch devices, two drive bays are available. Refer to section 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs for the LED descriptions. Optical Drive Empty 5.25-inch bay 7-in-1 Card Reader USB 2.0 ports Power button Reset button Power LED HDD access LED
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-6 1.5 Rear panel features The rear panel includes a slot for the motherboard rear I/O ports, expansion slots, a power supply module, and a vent for the system fan. The ports for the PS/2 keyboard, PS/2 mouse, USB, VGA, and Gigabit LAN do not appear on the rear panel if motherboard is not present. Power supply module Expansion slots Power supply switch Power cord connector PS/2 keyboard port USB 2.0 ports Optical S/PDIF Out port 8-channel audio Coaxial S/PDIF Out port USB 2.0 ports USB 2.0 ports External SA T A ports LAN1 (RJ-45) port LAN2 (RJ-45) port IEEE 1394a port 95mm system fan
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 1-7 1.6 Internal features The barebone server includes the basic components as shown. 1. Power supply unit 2. 95mm system fan 3. ASUS P5E WS Professional motherboard 4. Expansion card locks 5. Optical drive 6. 5.25-inch drive bay 7. 7-in-1 Card Reader 8. Front I/O board (hidden) 9. Internal HDD bays 10. Chassis intrusion switch 6 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10
Chapter 1: Product introduction 1-8 1.7 LED information 1.7.1 Front panel LEDs 1.7.2 LAN (RJ-45) LEDs LED Icon Display status Description Power LED ON System power ON HDD Access LED OFF Blinking No activity Read/write data into the HDD ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection HDD Access LED Power LED SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2- This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing or removing system components. Chapter 2 Hardware setup
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-2 2.1 Chassis cover 2.1.1 Removing the left side cover Y ou have to remove the left side cover to install or replace internal components of the server system. ⢠Ensure that you unplug the power cord before removing the side cover . ⢠T ake extra care when removing the side cover. Keep your îÂÂngers from components inside the chassis that can cause injury , such as the CPU fan, rear fan, and other sharp-edged parts. T o remove the left side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the left side cover to the chassis. 2. Slide the left side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. 2 1 1
2-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover Most internal components can be installed or replaced after removing the left side cover . However , for components such as Serial A T A hard disk drives, you may have to remove the right side cover for easier component installation or replacement. T o remove the right side cover 1. Remove the two screws that secure the left side cover to the chassis. 2 2. Slide the right side cover for about half an inch toward the rear until it is disengaged from the chassis. 3. Carefully lift the cover and set it aside. 1 1
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-4 P5E WS PRO î 2.2 Motherboard overview The barebone server comes with the P5E WS Professional motherboard already installed. The motherboard is secured to the chassis by nine (9) screws as indicated by the circles in the illustration below . Ensure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing any motherboard component or connection. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Refer to Chapter 3: Motherboard information for detailed information on the motherboard.
2-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.3.1 Installing the CPU T o install a CPU: 1. Locate the CPU socket on the motherboard. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) The motherboard comes with a surface mount LGA775 socket designed for the Intel î Xeon 3300 / 3200 / 3100 / 3000 Series processor in the 775-land package 2. Press the load lever with your thumb (A), then move it to the left (B) until it is released from the retention tab. Retention tab Load lever This side of the socket box should face you. PnP cap A B T o prevent damage to the socket pins, do not remove the PnP cap unless you are installing a CPU. Before installing the CPU, make sure that the socket box is facing towards you and the load lever is on your left. P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional CPU Socket 775
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-6 3. Lift the load lever in the direction of the arrow to a 135ú angle. 4. Lift the load plate with your thumb and foreîÂÂnger to a 100ú angle (A), then push the PnP cap from the load plate window to remove (B). 5. Position the CPU over the socket, making sure that the gold triangle is on the bottom-left corner of the socket. The socket alignment key should îÂÂt into the CPU notch. Alignment key Gold triangle mark Load plate A B The CPU îÂÂts in only one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the connectors on the socket and damaging the CPU!
2-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6. Close the load plate (A), then push the load lever (B) until it snaps into the retention tab. A B The motherboard supports Intel î Core 2 Extreme / Core 2 Quad / Core 2 Duo Series LGA775 processors with the Intel î Enhanced Memory 64 T echnology (EM64T), Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î T echnology (EIST), and Hyper-Threading T echnology . Refer to the Appendix for more information on these CPU features.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-8 T o install the CPU cooler and fan 1. Place the cooler on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the four screws match the holes on the support plate. 2.3.2 Installing the CPU heatsink The Intel î Core⢠2 Extreme / Core⢠2 Quad / Core⢠2 Duo Series processors require an Intel certiîÂÂed or ASUS qualiîÂÂed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. When you buy a boxed Intel CPU, the package includes the cooler , fan, retention brackets, screws, thermal grease, installation manual, and other items that are necessary for CPU installation. ⢠Ensure that you have applied the thermal grease to the top of the CPU before installing the heatsink and fan. ⢠Refer to the installation manual that came with the CPU package for details on heatsink/fan assmbly and installation. 2. Use a screwdriver to tighten the four cooler screws in a diagonal sequence. A A B B
2-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3. Connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN . Do not forget to connect the CPU_F AN connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector . P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional CPU fan connector CPU_F AN GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-10 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate II (DDR2) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets to support 240-pin DDR2 modules. The îÂÂgure illustrates the location of the DDR2 DIMM sockets: P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional 240-pin DDR2 DIMM sockets DIMM_A2 DIMM_A1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B1 Channel Sockets Channel A DIMM_A1 and DIMM_A2 Channel B DIMM_B1 and DIMM_B2 This chipset ofîÂÂcially supports DDR2 800/667MHz. With the ASUS Super Memspeed T echnology , the motherboard natively supports up to DDR2 1066MHz and provides more ratio setting items than the chipset ofîÂÂcially supports. Refer to the table below for details. FSB 1333 1066 DDR2 1066 800 667 1066 800 667
2-1 1 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 64-bit Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition Windows î Vista x64 Edition ⢠Due to chipset limitation, this motherboard can only support up to 8 GB on the operating systems listed below . Y ou may install a maximum of 2 GB DIMMs on each slot. ⢠Some old-version DDR2-800 DIMMs may not match Intel î âÂÂs On-Die-T ermination (ODT) requirement and will automatically downgrade to run at DDR2-667. If this happens, contact your memory vendor to check the ODT value. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DDR2-800 with CL=4 will be downgraded to run at DDR2-667 by default setting. If you want to operate with lower latency , adjust the memory timing manually . 2.4.2î MemoryîÂÂconîÂÂgurations Y ou may install 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, and 2 GB ECC and non-ECC, unbuffered DDR2 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Y ou may install varying memory sizes in Channel A and Channel B. The system maps the total size of the lower-sized channel for the dual-channel conîÂÂguration. Any excess memory from the higher-sized channel is then mapped for single-channel operation. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . ⢠If you install four 1GB memory modules, the system may only recognize less than 3GB of total memory because of address space allocation for other critical functions. This limitation appears on Windows î Vista 32-bit / Windows î XP 32-bit operation systems since it does not support Physical Address Extension (P AE) mode. ⢠If you install Windows î Vista 32-bit / Windows î XP 32-bit operation system, a total memory of less than 3GB is recommended. ⢠This motherboard does not support memory modules made up of 128 Mb chips or double sided x16 memory modules.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM T o install a DIMM: 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM T o remove a DIMM: 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. ⢠A DDR2 DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it îÂÂts in only one direction. Do not force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. ⢠The DDR2 DIMM sockets do not support DDR DIMMs. DO not install DDR DIMMs to the DDR2 DIMM sockets. Unlocked retaining clip DDR2 DIMM notch Unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so can cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. Support the DIMM lightly with your îÂÂngers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it îÂÂips out with extra force. DDR2 DIMM notch 1 2 3 1 1 2
2-13 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.5 Installing hard disk drives The server system supports four Serial A T A hard disk drives through screw-free hard disk drive holders. T o install a Serial A T A hard disk drive 1. Follow the instruction in section 2.1.2 Removing the right side cover to remove the right side cover . 2. Slightly push inward the HDD holder handles to release the HDD holder lock from the HDD bay , as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 3. Carefully pull the HDD holder out of the HDD bay , as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 2 2 3 4. Locate the four pin caps on the HDD holder . Align one side of the HDD screw holes to one side of the cage pin caps, as shown in the right îÂÂgure. Pin cap 4 5. Follow the direction of the arrow in the right îÂÂgure and slightly bend the HDD holder .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-14 6. Attach the other side of the HDD screw holes to the cage pin caps, as shown in the right îÂÂgure. 7. Carefully insert the HDD holder and push it all the way to the depth of the bay until the cage handles îÂÂx to the HDD bay .
2-15 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.6 Installing 5.25-inch drives Ensure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing any system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard and other system components! 1 2 The system comes with two 5.25-inch drive bays located on the upper front part of the chassis. An optical drive that comes standard/optional with the system package occupies the uppermost bay (labeled 1). The lower bay (labled 2) is available for additional 5.25-inch optical, zip, or îÂÂoppy disk drives. Y ou must remove the front panel cover before installing a 5.25-inch drive. 2.6.1 Removing the front panel cover T o remove the front panel cover 1. Follow the instructions in section 2.1 Chassis cover to remove both the side covers. 2. Locate the front cover slot on the bottom of the front cover .
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-16 3. Carefully remove the front panel cover , and then set aside. 2.6.2 Installing an additional optical drive ConîÂÂgure your optical drive as Master/Slave device before installing it to the drive bay . Refer to the optical drive documentation for details. T o install an additional optical drive 1. Select the drive bay you intend to use. Push the knock down metal cover in and out of the chassis until it is removed. T ake extra care when removing the knock down metal cover . Use tools such as a screw driver to bend and remove the metal cover to avoid physical injury .
2-17 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2. Follow the direction of the arrows in the îÂÂgure to unlock and lift the drive bay lock. 3. Carefully insert the drive to the bay . 4. Align the drive to the bay screw holes, and then lock the drive bay lock. 5. Connect a 40-pin IDE cable (from the îÂÂrst optical drive) and a 4-pin power plug (from the power supply unit) to the connectors on the drive.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-18 6. Remove the front panel bay cover opposite the drive bay you used by pressing the hooks inward. 7. Reinstall the front panel and side covers when done.
2-19 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.7 Expansion cards 2.7.1 Installing expansion cards The system comes with two PCI Express x16 slots (x8 link), one PCI Express x1 slot (x1 link), one PCI-X 64bit/133MHz slot, and two PCI 32-bit/33MHz/5V slots. Ensure to unplug the power cable before installing or removing an expansion card. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard and other system components! T o install an expansion card 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Lay the system on its side on a îÂÂat, stable surface. 3. Select the slot that you intend to use, and then remove the knock down metal cover . 4. Slightly push down the expansion card lock to unlock it from the chassis. 5. Lift the expansion card lock by following the direction of the arrow in the right îÂÂgure.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-20 6. Align the card connector with the slot, then press îÂÂrmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 7. Restore the expansion card lock to its original position and push it down until you hear a click sound. 2.7.2î ConîÂÂguringîÂÂanîÂÂexpansionîÂÂcard After installing the expansion card, conîÂÂgure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conîÂÂicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable. Refer to the table on the next page for details.
2-21 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.7.3 Interrupt assignments IRQ assignments for this motherboard A B C D E F G H PCI Slot 1 Shared â â â â â â â PCI Slot 2 â Shared â â â â â â LAN 1 (8056) â â Shared â â â â â LAN 2 (8056) â â â Shared â â â â SA T A (Marvell) Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X16_1 Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X16_2 Shared â â â â â â â PCIe X1_1 â Shared â â â â â â PCIX_1 â Shared â â â â â â USB Controller 1 â â â â â â â Shared USB Controller 2 â â â Shared â â â â USB Controller 3 â â Shared â â â â â USB Controller 4 Shared â â â â â â â USB Controller 5 Shared â â â â â â â USB Controller 6 â â â â â Shared â â USB 2.0 Controller 1 â â â â â â â Shared USB 2.0 Controller 2 â â Shared â â â â â SA T A Controller 1 â â Shared â â â â â SA T A Controller 2 â â â â â â Shared â Azalia ALC888 â â â â â â Shared â IRQ Priority Standard function 0 1 System timer 1 2 Keyboard controller 2 â Re-direct to IRQ#9 3 1 1 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 4 12 Communications port (COM1)* 5 13 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 6 14 Floppy disk controller 7 15 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 8 3 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 9 4 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 1 1 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 compatible mouse port* 13 8 Numeric data processor 14 9 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 15 10 IRQ holder for PCI steering* * These IRQs are usually available for PCI devices.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-22 2.8 Removing components Y ou may need to remove previously installed system components when installing or removing other system components, or when replacing a defective component. This section tells how to remove the following components: 1. Floppy disk drive (FDD) 2. System fan 3. SA T A backplane 2.8.1î RemovingîÂÂtheîÂÂîÂÂoppyîÂÂdiskîÂÂdrive T o remove the FDD 1. Disconnect the FDD power plug and signal cable. 3. Carefully pull the FDD bay from the chassis. 4. Remove the four screws from the FDD bay to release the FDD.
2-23 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2.8.2 Removing the system fan T o remove the system fan 1. Disconnect the chassis fan cable from the CHA_F AN1 connector on the motherboard. 2. Locate and remove four system fan screws at the rear panel. Keep the screws for later use. Hold the system fan with one hand while removing the system screws. 3. Remove the system fan, and then set aside. P5E WS PRO î P5E WS Professional Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-24 T o remove the SA T A backplane 1. Remove the right side cover îÂÂrst. Disconnect all SA T A cables and power cables connected to the SA T A backplane. 2.8.3 Removing the SA T A backplane Remove all hard drives before removing the SA T A backplane. 2. Remove all the six screws on the back of the SA T A backplane holder with a screwdriver . 3. T ake out the SA T A backplane with the backplane holder and place on a îÂÂat surface. The TW300-E5/PI4 Workstation uses only the four SA T A HDD connectors labelled DEVICE1- 4. 4 3 2 1
2-25 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4. Remove all the six screws on the holder to replace the SA T A backplane.
Chapter 2: Hardware setup 2-26 2.9 Connecting cables The TW300-E5/PI4 chassis includes the power and signal cables that you need to connect to the motherboard, storage drives, and other devices that you intend to install. ⢠The bundled system cables are pre-connected before shipment. Y ou do not need to disconnect these cables unless you will remove pre-installed components to install additional devices. ⢠Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on the connectors. Standard cables connected to the motherboard 1. 24-pin A TX 12V power plug 2. 4-pin A TX 12V power plug 3. Card Reader cable 4. Front panel USB 2.0 cable 5. IDE signal cable 6. Serial A T A signal cables 7. System panel cable 8. System fan cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter gives information about the motherboard that comes with the workstation. This chapter includes the motherboard layout, jumper settings, and connector locations. Chapter 3 Motherboard info
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-2 3.1 Motherboard layouts P5E WS Professional Motherboard P ANEL P5 E W S P RO î AAFP CHASSIS 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) CPU_FAN DDR2 DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) FLOPPY Super I/O CD PCIEX16_1 PCI2 CLRTC SB_PWR EA TXPWR CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CHA_FAN2 COM1 EA TX12V LGA775 Intel î X38 IE1394_2 PWR_FAN Intel î ICH9R Marvell î 88E8056 USB78 PCIEX1_1 PCIX_1 LAN2_USB34 KB_USB56 LAN1_USB12 AUDIO F_ESA TA12 SPDIF_O12 VIA VT6308S TPM BIOS CHA_FAN1 DET_X16_1 DET_X1_1 DET_PCIX_1 EXT_SA T A2 EXT_SA T A1 PCIEX16_2 USB910 USB1 112 PCIX_SPEED1 SA T A2 SA T A1 SA T A4 SA T A3 SA T A6 SA T A5 DDR2 DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR2 DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DET_PCI2 DET_X16_2 ALC888 PRI_IDE Marvell î 88E6145 NEC upd 720404 PCI1 DET_PCI1 Marvell î 88E8056 ICS Refer to 3.3 Connectors for more information about rear panel connectors and internal connectors.
3-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED that lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off AI Slot Detector This motherboard comes with on-board LEDs that light up when the PCIE/PCI devices are not correctly installed. When the power cord is plugged in and the LED lights up, reinstall the device correctly . Refer to the îÂÂgure on the right for the location of the LEDs. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Slot Detectors DET_X16_1 DET_X1_1 DET_PCIX_1 DET_X16_2 DET_PCI1 DET_PCI2 ⢠The PCIEx16_1-2 slots (blue) support PCIE x16 cards only . The AI Slot Detector lights up when you install x1 or x4 cards to these slots. ⢠When the AI Slot Detector lights up for incorrect installation, make sure to turn off the power supply unit before reinstaling the card to avoid electrical shock hazard.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-4 Layout contents Jumper Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLR TC_EN ) 3-6 2. PCI-X Speed setting (3-pin PCIX_SPEED1) 3-7 Rear panel connectors Page 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) 3-8 2. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port 3-8 3. LAN 1 (RJ-45) port 3-8 4. IEEE 1394a port 3-8 5. LAN 2 (RJ-45) port 3-8 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange) 3-8 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black) 3-8 8. Line In port (light blue) 3-8 9. Line Out port (lime) 3-8 10. Microphone port (pink) 3-9 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray) 3-9 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 3-9 13. External SA T A ports 3-9 14. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 3-10 15. Optical S/PDIF Out port 3-10 16. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6 3-10
3-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Internal connectors Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY ) 3-1 1 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE ) 3-12 3. ICH9R Serial A T A connectors [blue] (7-pin SA T A1-6 ) 3-13 4. Marvell î 88SE6145 Serial A T A RAID connectors [black] (7-pin EXT_SA T A1-2) 3-14 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12 ) 3-15 6. IEEE 1394a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1 ) 3-15 7. Optical audio drive connector (4-pin CD) 3-16 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) 3-16 9. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1-2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) 3-17 10. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS ) 3-17 1 1. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 3-18 12. TPM connector (20-1 pin TPM) 3-18 13 . A TX power connectors (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V ) 3-19 14. System panel connector (20-8-pin P ANEL ) 3-20 15. ASUS Q-connector (system panel) 3-21
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-6 3.2 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. If the steps above do not help, remove the onboard battery and move the jumper again to clear the CMOS RTC RAM data. After the CMOS clearance, reinstall the battery . Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLR TC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! T o erase the RTC RAM 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Move the jumper cap from pins 1âÂÂ2 (default) to pins 2âÂÂ3. Keep the cap on pins 2âÂÂ3 for about 5âÂÂ10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1âÂÂ2. 3. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 4. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear RTC (Default) 1 2 2 3
3-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 2. PCI-X Speed setting (3-pin PCIX_SPEED1) This jumper allows you to set the PCI-X slotâÂÂs maximum frequency capability . TheîÂÂjumperîÂÂcapîÂÂonîÂÂpinsîÂÂ1-2: 133 MHz capability for the PCI-X slot. TheîÂÂjumperîÂÂcapîÂÂonîÂÂpinsîÂÂ2-3: 100 MHz capability for the PCI-X slot. P5E W S PRO î 3 2 P5E WS Professional PCIX speed setting PCIX_SPEED1 100MHz 133MHz (Default) 1 2
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-8 3.3 Connectors 3.3.1 Rear panel connectors 1. PS/2 keyboard port (purple) PS/2 keyboard port (purple) . This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. 2. Coaxial S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 3. LAN1 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 4. IEEE1394a port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed This 6-pin IEEE 1394a port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, PCs, or portable devices. . 5. LAN2 (RJ-45) port. Supported by Marvell î Gigabit LAN controller , this port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 6. Center/Subwoofer port (orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. 7. Rear Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the rear speakers in a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 8. Line In port (light blue). This port connects the tape, CD, DVD player , or other audio sources. 9. Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker . In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel conîÂÂguration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. LAN port LED indications SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port 2 1 5 4 6 13 10 1 1 8 9 7 15 12 3 14 16 Activity/Link LED Speed LED Status Description Status Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection ORANGE Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection
3-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 10. Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 1 1. Side Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio conîÂÂguration. 12. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 13. External SA T A ports . These ports connect to external Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o conîÂÂgure a RAID 0, 1, 5 or 10 set, install an external Serial A T A hard disk drive to the external Serial A T A port and an internal Serial A T A hard disk drive to the onboard Serial A T A connectors labeled EXT_SA T A1 or EXT_SA T A2. Refer to the audio conîÂÂguration table below for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel conîÂÂguration. AudioîÂÂ2,îÂÂ4,îÂÂ6,îÂÂorîÂÂ8-channelîÂÂconîÂÂguration Port Headset 2-channel 4-channel 6-channel 8-channel Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Orange â â Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Black â Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Ou Rear Speaker Out Gray â â â Side Speaker Out ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that yo u ha ve conn ect ed the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Marvell RAID utility and SA T A setup during POST . ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using one of these connectors, set the Marvell SA T A/P A T A Controller item in the BIOS to [RAID Mode]. See section 4.5.3îÂÂOnBoardîÂÂDevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. The external SA T A ports support external Serial A T A 3.0 Gb/s devices. Longer cables support higher power requirements to deliver signal up to two meters away , and enables improved hot-swap function.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-10 14. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 15. Optical S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via an optical S/PDIF cable. 16. USB 2.0 ports 5 and 6. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. ⢠DO NOT insert dif ferent connectors to these ports. ⢠DO NOT unplug the external Serial A T A box when a RAID 0 or RAID 1 is conîÂÂgured.
3-1 1 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3.3.2 Internal connectors 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34âÂÂ1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector is for the provided Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector , then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the îÂÂoppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using a FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Floppy disk drive connector NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. PIN 1 FLOPPY
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-12 ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra A T A cable connector . This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80 âÂÂconductor IDE cable for Ultra A T A 100/66/33 IDE devices. DriveîÂÂjumperîÂÂsetting Mode of device(s) Cable connector Single device Cable-Select or Master - Black T wo devices Cable-Select Master Black Slave Gray Master Master Black or gray Slave Slave If any device jumper is set as âÂÂCable-Select,â make sure all other device jumpers have the same setting. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE PIN 1 2. IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) The onboard IDE connector is for the Ultra DMA 133/100 signal cable. There are three connectors on each Ultra DMA 133/100 signal cable: blue, black, and gray . Connect the blue connector to the motherboardâ s IDE connector , then select one of the following modes to conîÂÂgure your device.
3-13 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 3. ICH9R Serial A T A connectors [blue] (7-pin SA T A1-6) These connectors are for the Serial A T A signal cables for Serial A T A hard disk drives and optical disk drives. ⢠Wh en usi ng the con nec tor s i n Standard IDE mode, connect the primary (boot) hard disk drive to the SA T A1/2 connector . Refer to the table below for the recommended SA T A hard disk drive connections. ⢠These connectors are set to Standard IDE mode by default. In Standard IDE mode, you can connect Serial A T A boot/data hard drives to these connectors. If you intend to create a Serial A T A RAID set using these connectors, set the ConîÂÂgure SA T A as item in the BIOS to [RAID]. See section 4.3.6îÂÂSA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. ⢠Before creating a RAID set, refer to 5.1îÂÂRAIDîÂÂConîÂÂgurations or the manual bundled in the motherboard support DVD. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional SA T A connectors SA T A 2 SA T A1 GND RSA TA _TXP2 RSA TA _TXN2 GND RSA TA _RXP2 RSA TA _RXN2 GND GND RSA TA _TXP1 RSA TA _TXN1 GND RSA TA _RXP1 RSA TA _RXN1 GND SA T A3 SA T A4 GND RSA TA _TXP3 RSA TA _TXN3 GND RSA TA _RXP3 RSA TA _RXN3 GND GND RSA TA _TXP4 RSA TA _TXN4 GND RSA TA _RXP4 RSA TA _RXN4 GND SA T A 6 SA T A5 GND RSA TA _TXP6 RSA TA _TXN6 GND RSA TA _RXP6 RSA TA _RXN6 GND GND RSA TA _TXP5 RSA TA _TXN5 GND RSA TA _RXP5 RSA TA _RXN5 GND Serial A T A hard disk drive connection Connector Color Setting Use SA T A 1/2 Blue Master Boot disk SA T A 3/4 Blue Slave Boot/Data disk SA T A 5/6 Blue Master Boot disk Connect the right-angle side of SA T A signal cable to SA T A device. Or you may connect the right-angle side of SA T A cable to the onboard SA T A port to avoid mechanical conîÂÂict with huge graphics cards. Right angle side
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-14 4. Marvell î 88SE6145 Serial A T A RAID connectors [black] (7-pin EXT_SA T A1-2) These connectors are for Serial A T A signal cables that support Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o conîÂÂgure RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5 or RAID 10, install an internal Serial A T A hard disk drive to one of these connectors and an external Serial A T A drive to one of the external SA T A ports. Before creating a RAID set using Serial A T A hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Serial A T A signal cables and installed Serial A T A hard disk drives; otherwise, you cannot enter the Marvell RAID utility and SA T A BIOS setup during POST . P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional EXT_SA T A connectors EXT_SA T A 2 EXT_SA T A1 GND RSA TA _TXP2 RSA TA _TXN2 GND RSA TA _RXP2 RSA TA _RXN2 GND GND RSA TA _TXP1 RSA TA _TXN1 GND RSA TA _RXP1 RSA TA _RXN1 GND ⢠Please install the Marvell î Controller driver before using the black Serial A T A RAID connectors (EXT_SA T A1-2). Refer to 6.2.4 Make Disk menu for details. ⢠If you intend to create a RAID conîÂÂguration using one of the Marvell î Serial A T A RAID connectors and one of the external SA T A ports, it is strongly recommended to install the OS on the internal hard disk drive and use the external hard disk drive as a data disk.
3-15 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB78, USB910, USB1 1 12) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 speciîÂÂcation that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. Y ou can connect the USB cable to ASUS Q-Connector (USB, blue) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (USB) to the USB connector onboard. Never connect a 1394 cable to the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional USB 2.0 connectors USB 1 1 1 2 USB 5V USB_P12- USB_P12 GND NC USB 5V USB_P1 1- USB_P1 1 GND USB910 USB 5V USB_P10- USB_P10 GND NC USB 5V USB_P9- USB_P9 GND USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 6. IEE E 1394 a port connector (10-1 pin IE1394_1) This connector is for an IEEE 1394a port. Connect the IEEE 1394a module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a USB cable to the IEEE 1394a connector . Doing so will damage the motherboard! Y o u can connect the 1394 c able to ASU S Q-Con nector (1394, red) îÂÂrst, and then install the Q-Connector (1394) to the 1394 connector onboard. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional IEEE 1394a connector IE1394_1 PIN 1 GND 12V TPB1- GND TP A1- 12V TPB1 GND TP A1
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-16 7. Optical drive audio co nne cto r (4-pin CD) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. 8. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM1) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector , then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Internal audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional COM port connector PIN 1 COM1
3-17 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 9. CPU, chassis, and power fan connectors (4-pin CPU_F AN, 3-pin CHA_F AN1-2, 3-pin PWR_F AN) The fan c onnect ors su pport co oling fans o f 350 mA~2000 mA (24 W max.) or a total of 1 A~7 A (84 W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. InsufîÂÂcient air îÂÂow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! Do not place jumper caps on the fan connectors! Only the CPU-F AN and CHA-F AN 1-2 connectors support the ASUS Q-F AN 2 feature. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V CHA_F AN2 PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND CPU F AN PWR CPU FAN IN CPU F AN PWM GND Rotation 12V 10. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector . The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pin labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default)
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-18 1 1. Front panel audio co nne cto r (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC`97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector . ⢠We reco mmend that yo u conn ect a h igh-de îÂÂnitio n fr ont pa nel aud io mod ule to t his co nnector to av ail of the mo therbo ardâ s hi gh-d eîÂÂniti on audi o capa bility . ⢠By default, this connector is set to [HD Audio] . If you want to connect an AC'97 front panel audio module to this connector , set the Front Panel T ype item in the BIOS setup to [AC'97] . See section 4.5.3 Onboard DevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration for details. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy AC 97 audio pin definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L POR T2 R POR T2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND NC MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L NC NC MICPWR NC AGND HD Audio-compliant pin definition 12. TPM con nec tor (20-1 pin TPM) [Optional] This connector supports a T rusted Platform Module (TPM) system, which can securely store keys, digital certiîÂÂcates, passwords, and data. A TPM system also helps enhance network security , protects digital identities, and ensures platform integrity . P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional TPM connector TPM
3-19 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 ⢠For a fully conîÂÂgured system, we recommend that you use a power supply unit (PSU) that complies with A TX 12 V SpeciîÂÂcation 2.0 (or later version) and provides a minimum power of 400 W . ⢠Do not forget to connect the 8-pin EA TX12V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when conîÂÂguring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠If you want to use two high-end PCI Express x16 cards, use a PSU with 500W to 600W power or above to ensure the system stability . ⢠If you are uncertain about the minimum power supply requirement for your system, refer to the Recommended Power Supply W attage Calculator at http://support.asus.com/PowerSupplyCalculator/PSCalculator . aspx?SLanguage=en-us for details. 13. ATX po wer co nn ec tor s (24-pin EA TXPWR, 8-pin EA TX12V) These connectors are for A TX power supply plugs. The power supply plu gs are designed to îÂÂt these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down îÂÂrmly until the connectors completely îÂÂt. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional A TX power connectors EA TXPW R 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts 5 Volts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground EA TX12V GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 12V DC
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-20 ⢠System power LED (2-pin PLED) This 2-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector . The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector . The IDE LED lights up or îÂÂashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker . The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠A TX power button/soft-off button (2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system on or puts the system in sleep or soft-off mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset button (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power . 14. System panel connector (20-8 pin P ANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. P5E W S PRO î P5E WS Professional System panel connector * Requires an A TX power supply . P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker Ground RESET Ground Reset Ground Ground PWRSW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED PLED SPEAKER
3-21 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 15. Q-Connector (system panel) Y ou can use ASUS Q-Connector to connect / disconnect chassis front panel cables by only a few steps. Directions below shows how to install ASUS Q- Connector . Step2. Properly install the ASUS Q-Connector to the System panel connctor . Step1. Connect correct front panel to ASUS Q-Connector îÂÂrst. Y ou can refer to the marking on Q-Connector itself to know the detail pin deîÂÂnition. Step3. Front panel functions are enabled.
Chapter 3: Motherboard information 3-22
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus and describes the BIOS parameters. Chapter 4 BIOS information
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-2 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash 2 (Updates the BIOS using a îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk.) 3. ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.) 4. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk, USB îÂÂash disk or the motherboard support DVD when the BIOS îÂÂle fails or gets corrupted.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk or USB îÂÂash disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities. Installing ASUS Update T o install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support DVD in the optical drive. The Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS îÂÂle ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support DVD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP).
4-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility . 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network trafîÂÂc, or click Auto Select. Click Next. Updating the BIOS through the Internet T o update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-4 UpdatingîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂthroughîÂÂaîÂÂBIOSîÂÂîÂÂle T o update the BIOS through a BIOS îÂÂle: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > Programs > ASUS > ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle option from the drop-down menu, then click Next. 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS îÂÂle from the Open window , then click Open. 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. P5EWP P5EWP.rom
4-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.2î CreatingîÂÂaîÂÂbootableîÂÂîÂÂoppyîÂÂdisk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable îÂÂoppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB îÂÂoppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/ S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My Computer. c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File from the menu, then select Format. A Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options îÂÂeld, then click Start. Windows î Vista environment a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB îÂÂoppy disk to the îÂÂoppy disk drive. b. Click from the Windows î desktop, then select Computer. c. Right-click Floppy Disk Drive then click Format to display the Format 3 1/2 Floppy dialog box . d. Select the Create an MS-DOS startup disk check box. e. Click Start. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS îÂÂle to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-6 4.1.3 ASUS EZ Flash 2 utility The ASUS EZ Flash 2 feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a îÂÂoppy disk and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash 2 utility is built in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). T o update the BIOS using EZ Flash 2 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. 2. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB îÂÂash disk, then restart the system. 3. Y ou can launch the EZ Flash 2 by two methods. (1) Insert the îÂÂoppy disk / USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk drive or the USB port. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. (2) Enter BIOS setup program. Go to the T ools menu to select EZ Flash 2 and press <Enter> to enable it. Y ou can switch between drives by pressing <T ab> before the correct îÂÂle is found. Then press <Enter>. 4. When the correct BIOS îÂÂle is found, EZ Flash 2 performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îÂÂash disk or a îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.06 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: WINBOND W25P/X16 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown
4-7 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS îÂÂle in DOS environment using a bootable îÂÂoppy disk with the updated BIOS îÂÂle. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS îÂÂle that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS T o copy the current BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: MainîÂÂîÂÂlename Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support DVD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[î¿lename] where the [îÂÂlename] is any user-assigned îÂÂlename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main îÂÂlename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom ⢠Make sure that the îÂÂoppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 1024KB free space to save the îÂÂle. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only . The actual BIOS screen displays may not be same as shown. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS îÂÂle to the îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.rom AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. Reading îÂÂash ..... done Write to î¿le...... ok A:\> The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS îÂÂle. UpdatingîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂîÂÂle T o update the BIOS îÂÂle using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) and download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for the motherboard. Save the BIOS îÂÂle to a bootable îÂÂoppy disk.
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-8 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support DVD to the bootable îÂÂoppy disk you created earlier . 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[î¿lename] where [îÂÂlename] is the latest or the original BIOS îÂÂle on the bootable îÂÂoppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM Write the BIOS îÂÂlename on a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS îÂÂlename at the DOS prompt. 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... done Verifying îÂÂash .... done Please restart your computer A:\> A:\>afudos /iP5EWP.ROM AM I F irm war e Up dat e U ti li ty - V ers io n 1.1 9(A SU S V2. 07( 03. 11 .2 4BB )) Cop yrig ht ( C) 20 02 A meri can Meg atre nds, Inc. All rig hts r eser ved. WARNING!! Do not turn off power during îÂÂash BIOS Reading î¿le ....... done Reading îÂÂash ...... done Advance Check ...... Erasing îÂÂash ...... done Writing îÂÂash ...... 0x0008CC00 (9%) 4. The utility veriîÂÂes the îÂÂle and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure!
4-9 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4.1.5 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS îÂÂle when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Y ou can update a corrupted BIOS îÂÂle using the motherboard support DVD or the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the updated BIOS îÂÂle. Prepare the motherboard support DVD, the îÂÂoppy disk or the USB îÂÂash disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility . Recovering the BIOS from the support DVD T o recover the BIOS from the support DVD 1. T urn on the system. 2. Insert the motherboard support DVD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the DVD for the BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for îÂÂoppy... Floppy found! Reading î¿le âÂÂP5EWP.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start îÂÂashing... RecoveringîÂÂtheîÂÂBIOSîÂÂfromîÂÂtheîÂÂUSBîÂÂîÂÂashîÂÂdisk T o recover the BIOS from the USB îÂÂash disk: 1. Insert the USB îÂÂash disk that contains the BIOS îÂÂle to the USB port. 2. T urn on the system. 3. The utility will automatically checks the devices for the BIOS îÂÂle. When found, the utility reads the BIOS îÂÂle and starts îÂÂashing the corrupted BIOS îÂÂle. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. ⢠Only the USB îÂÂash disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition can support ASUS CrashFree BIOS 3. The device size should be smaller than 8GB. ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure!
Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4-10 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable îÂÂrmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS . Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconîÂÂguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun Setup.â This section explains how to conîÂÂgure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the conîÂÂguration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconîÂÂgure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the SPI chip. The îÂÂrmware chip on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On Self-T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the îÂÂrst two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section 4.9 Exit Menu. ⢠The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS îÂÂle for this motherboard.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-1 1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system conîÂÂguration Ai T weaker For changing the system performance settings Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) conîÂÂguration Boot For changing the system boot conîÂÂguration T ools For conîÂÂguring special system functions Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another . Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Mon 08/13/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] SATA 1 [WDC WD800JD-00LSA0] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] SATA Coniguration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂîÂÂelds Menu items
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the speciîÂÂc items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the iteam has a sub-menu. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6î ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂîÂÂelds These îÂÂelds show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- conîÂÂgurable, you can change the value of the îÂÂeld opposite the item. Y ou cannot select an item that is not user-conîÂÂgurable. A conîÂÂgurable îÂÂeld is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a îÂÂeld, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to 4.2.7 Pop-up window. 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the conîÂÂguration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not îÂÂt on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> /<Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Scroll bar Pop-up window System Time [06:22:54] System Date [Fri 03/09/2007] Legac y Disket te A [ 1. 44 M, 3. 5 in] SATA 1 [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 2 [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 3 [No t D ete cte d] SATA 3 [No t D ete cte d] [N ot D ete cte d] SATA 4 [No t D ete cte d] SATA 4 [No t D ete cte d] [N ot D ete cte d] IDE Conî¿guration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB], or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of îÂÂoppy drive installed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [720K, 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. ConîÂÂguration options: [Chinese BIG5] [Chinese (GB)] [Japanese] [Français] [German] [English] Refer to section 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a î¿eld. Use [ ] or [-] to conî¿gure system Time. System Time [10:55:25] System Date [Wed 08/22/2007] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] SATA 1 [WDC WD800JD-00LSA0] SATA 2 [Not Detected] SATA 3 [Not Detected] SATA 4 [Not Detected] SATA 5 [Not Detected] SATA 6 [Not Detected] SATA Coniguration System Information
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 S A T A 1 ~ 6 While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-conîÂÂgurable. These items show Not Detected if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to [Auto] allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select [CDROM] if you are speciîÂÂcally conîÂÂguring a CD-ROM drive. Select [ARMD] (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. ConîÂÂguration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to [Auto] enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to [Auto], the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main SATA 1 Device : Hard Disk Vendor : WDC WD800JD-00LSA0 Size : 80.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : 4 Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Enabled] Select the type of device connected to the system.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-15 DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Enabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂgurationîÂÂ[Enhanced] ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Compatible] [Enhanced] Configure SA T A as [IDE] Sets the conîÂÂguration for the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge chip. ConîÂÂguration options: [IDE] [RAID] [AHCI] ⢠If you want to use the Serial A T A hard disk drives as Parallel A T A physical storage devices, keep the default setting [IDE]. ⢠If you want the Serial A T A hard disk drives to use the Advanced Host Controller Interface (AHCI), set this item to [AHCI]. The AHCI allows the onboard storage driver to enable advanced Serial A T A features that increases storage performance on random workloads by allowing the drive to internally optimize the order of commands. ⢠If you want to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 10, or the Intel î Matrix Storage T echnology conîÂÂguration from the Serial A T A hard disk drives, set this item to [RAID]. 4.3.6î SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the conîÂÂgurations for the SA T A devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you want to conîÂÂgure the item. SATA Conî¿guration SATA Conî¿guraton [Enhanced] Conî¿gure SATA as [IDE] Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] SATA Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Options Disabled Compatiable Enhanced
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Hard Disk Write Protect [Disabled] Disables or enables device write protection. This will be ef fective only if device is accessed throuh BIOS ConîÂÂuration option: [Disabled] [Enabled] SA T A Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] 4.3.7î AHCIîÂÂConîÂÂguration This menu is the section for AHCI conîÂÂguration. It appears only when you set the ConîÂÂgureîÂÂSA T AîÂÂasî item from the sub-menu of SA T A îÂÂConîÂÂguration to [AHCI]. AHCI Settings AHCI CD/DVD Boot Time out [15] AHCI Port1 [Not Detected] AHCI Port2 [Not Detected] AHCI Port3 [Not Detected] AHCI Port4 [Not Detected] AHCI Port5 [Not Detected] AHCI Port6 [Not Detected] Some SATA CD/DVD in AHCI mode need to wait ready longer. AHCI CD/DVD Boot Time out [15] Selects the boot time out value for AHCI CD/DVD devices. Congifuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] AHCI Port1~6 [XXXX] Displays the status of auto-detection of SA T A devices. AHCI Port1 Device :Not Detected SATA Port1 [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Enabled] Select the type of devices connected to the system. SA T A Port1 [Auto] Allows you to select the type of device connected to the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Not Installed] SMART Monitoring [Enabled] Allows you to set the Self-Monitoring, Analysis and Reporting T echnology . ConîÂÂgration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-17 4.3.8 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system speciîÂÂcations. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. ASUS BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU speciîÂÂcation. System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory . Select Screen Select Item F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main ASUS BIOS Version : 0123 Build Date : 08/27/07 Processor Type : Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo CPU @ 3.00GHz Speed : 3000MHz Count : 2 System Memory Available : 1024MB
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4 Ai Tweaker menu The Ai T weaker menu items allow you to change the settings for the system performance. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Ai T weaker menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. 4.4.1 Ai Overclock T uner [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Select one of the preset overclocking conîÂÂguration options: The following sub-item only appears when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [N.O.S]. N.O.S. Mode [Auto] Allows you to set the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Standard] [SensitIve] [Heavy Load] Manual Allows you to individually set overclocking parameters. Auto Loads the optimal settings for the system. N.O.S. The ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. X.M.P . If you install memory module(s) supporting the eXtreme Memory ProîÂÂle (X.M.P .) T echnology , choose this item to set the proîÂÂle(s) supported by your memory module(s) for optimizing the system performance. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2008, American Megatrends, Inc. North Bridge Voltage [Auto] South Bridge Voltage [Auto] Clock Over-Charging Voltage [Auto] CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] Scroll down to display the following items: Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Conî¿gure System Frequency/Voltage Ai Overclock Tuner [Auto] CPU Ratio Control [Auto] FSB Strap to North Bridge [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Command Rate [Auto] DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A [Auto] DRAM CMD Skew on Channel B [Auto] DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A [Auto] DRAM CLK Skew on Channel B [Auto] DRAM Timing Control [Auto] DRAM Static Read Control [Auto] Ai Clock Twister [Auto] Transaction Booster [Auto] CPU Voltage [Auto] CPU PLL Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] DRAM Voltage [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recomends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-19 T urbo N.O.S. [Overclock 3%] This sub-item appears only when you set the N.O.S. Mode item to either [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy Load]. Allows you to set the maximum overclock percentage for the selected N.O.S. mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] The conîÂÂguration options for the following sub-item vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. eXtreme Memory Profile [Disabled] This item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [X.M.P .]. Allows you to select the X.M.P . mode supported by your Memory module. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [ProîÂÂle #1] [ProîÂÂle #2] 4.4.2 CPU Ratio Control [Auto] This item allows you to set the ratio between CPU Core Clock and FSB Frequency . The value is adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [06.0]âÂÂ[31.0] 4.4.3 FSB Strap to North Bridge [Auto] When set to [Auto], the FSB Strap will be adjusted automatically by FSB Frequency and DRAM Frequency . Congifuration options: [Auto] [200MHz] [266MHz] [333MHz] The following item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual]. FSB Frequency [XXX] Displays the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The value of this item is auto-detected by the BIOS. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the FSB frequency . Y ou can also type the desired CPU frequency using the numeric keypad. The values range from 200 to 800. Refer to the table below for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 1333 333 MHz FSB 1066 266 MHz FSB 800 200 MHz
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The following item appears only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual], [N.O.S.] and [X.M.P .]. PCIE Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the PCI Express frequency . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the PCIE frequency . The values range from 100 to 150. 4.4.4 DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR2 operating frequency . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [DDR2-667MHz] [DDR2-800MHz] [DDR2-835MHz] [DDR2-1002MHz] [DDR2-1066MHz] [DDR2-1 1 1 1MHz] [DDR2-133MHz] [DDR2- *1200 MHz*] The DRAM Frequency conîÂÂguration options vary with the FSB Frequency settings. Selecting a very high DRAM frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. 4.4.5 DRAM Command Rate [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1T] [2T] 4.4.6 DRAM CMD Skew on Channel A/B [Auto] These items are adjustable only when you set the DRAM Command Rate item to [1T] and may help enhancing DRAM stability on 1T mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Advance 175ps] [Advance 150ps] [Advance 125ps] [Advance 100ps] [Advance 75ps] [Advance 50ps] [Advance 25ps] [Normal] [Delay 25ps] [Delay 50ps] [Delay 75ps] [Delay 100ps] [Delay 125ps] [Delay 150ps] [Delay 175ps] 4.4.7 DRAM CLK Skew on Channel A/B [Auto] Adjusting these items may help enhancing DRAM overclocking ability . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Advance 350ps] [Advance 300ps] [Advance 250ps] [Advance 200ps] [Advance 150ps] [Advance 100ps] [Advance 50ps] [Normal] [Delay 50ps] [Delay 100ps] [Delay 150ps] [Delay 200ps] [Delay 250ps] [Delay 300ps] [Delay 350ps] 4.4.8 DRAM Timing Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Manual]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-21 ⢠The following sub-items apprear only when you set the DRAM T iming Control item to [Manual]. ⢠The conîÂÂguration options for some of the following items vary depending on the DIMMs you install on the motherboard. CAS# Latency [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks] [5 DRAM Clocks] [6 DRAM Clocks] [7 DRAM Clocks] RAS# to CAS# Delay [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[17 DRAM Clocks] [18 DRAM Clocks] RAS# Precharge [ 5 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[17 DRAM Clocks] [18 DRAM Clocks] RAS# Active T ime [15 DRAM Clocks] ConîÂÂguration options: [3 DRAM Clocks] [4 DRAM Clocks]~[33 DRAM Clocks] [34 DRAM Clocks] RAS# to RAS# Delay [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Row Refresh Cycle T ime [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [20 DRAM Clocks] [25 DRAM Clocks] [30 DRAM Clocks] [35 DRAM Clocks] [42 DRAM Clocks] Write Recovery Time [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Write to Read Delay [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] Read to Precharge T ime [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [1 DRAM Clocks]~[15 DRAM Clocks] 4.4.9 DRAM Static Read Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.4.10 Ai Clock T wister [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM performance. Set this item to [Light] to enhance DRAM compatibility , or [Strong] to enhance DRAM performance. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Moderate] [Light] [Strong]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.1 1 T ransaction Booster [Auto] Allows you to set the system performance. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Relax Level [1] This sub-item appears only when you set the T ransaction Booster item to [Disabled]. Set this item to a higher level to get better compatibility . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. The values range from 1 to 4. Boost Level [1] This sub-item appears only when you set the T ransaction Booster item to [Enabled]. Set this item to a higher level to get better performance. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. The values range from 1 to 8. The following seven items on the next page appear only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual] and [X.M.P .] and are adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . 4.4.12 CPU V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU VCore voltage. The values range from 0.85000V to 1.70000V with a 0.00625V interval. Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU Vcore voltage. Setting a high VCore voltage may damage the CPU permanently , and setting a low VCore voltage may make the system unstable. 4.4.13 CPU PLL V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the CPU PLL voltage. The values range from 1.00V to 2.30V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.14 FSB T ermination V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the front side bus termination voltage. The values range from 1.20V to 1.50V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.15 DRAM V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the DRAM voltage. The values range from 1.80V to 3.00V with a 0.02V interval. 4.4.16 North Bridge V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the North Bridge voltage. The values range from 1.25V to 1.91V with a 0.02V interval.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-23 ⢠Setting the CPU PLL V oltage, FSB T ermination V oltage, DRAM Voltage and North Bridge V oltage to a high level may damage the chipset, memory module, and CPU permanently . Proceed with caution. ⢠Some values of the CPU PLL V oltage, FSB T ermination V oltage, DRAM V oltage and North Bridge V oltage items are labeled in different color , indicating the risk levels of high voltage settings. Refer to the table below for details. ⢠The system may need better cooling system to work stably under high voltage settings. Blue Y ellow Purple Red CPU PLL Voltage 1.50V~1.78V 1.80V~2.00V 2.02V~2.20V 2.22V~2.30V FSB T ermination V oltage 1.20V~1.38V 1.40V~1.50V N/A N/A DRAM V oltage 1.80V~1.86V 1.88V~1.92V 1.94V~2.50V 2.52V~3.00V North Bridge V oltage 1.25V~1.41V 1.43V~1.55V 1.57V~1.73V 1.75V~1.91V 4.4.17 South Bridge V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the South Bridge voltage. The values range from 1.05V to 1.15V with a 0.10V interval. 4.4.18 Clock Over-Charging V oltage [Auto] Allows you to set the Clock Over-Charging voltage. The values range from 0.70V to 1.00V with a 0.10V interval. The following three items appear only when you set the Ai Overclock T uner item to [Manual], [N.O.S.], and [X.M.P .]. CPU V oltage Damper [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU voltage damper . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU V oltage Reference [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0.63x] [0.615x] [0.65x] [0.67x] North Bridge V oltage Reference [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [0.67x] [0.61x] 4.4.19 CPU Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the CPU clock spread spectrum. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.20 PCIE Spread Spectrum [Auto] Allows you to disable or set to auto the PCI Express clock spread spectrum. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-25 4.5 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit CPU Conî¿guration Chipset Onboard Devices Conî¿guration PCIPnP USB Conî¿guration Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Conî¿gure CPU. 4.5.1î CPUîÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Conî¿gure advanced CPU settings Manufacturer:Intel Brand String:Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo CPU @ 3.00GHz Frequency :3.00GHz FSB Speed :1333MHz Cache L1 :64 KB Cache L2 :4096 KB CPUID :6F9 Ratio Status:Unlocked (Max:09, Min:06) Ratio Actual Value :9 CPU Ratio Control [Auto] C1E Support [Enabled] CPU TM Function [Enabled] Vanderpool Technology [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Intel(R) SpeedStep(TM) Tech. [Enabled] Options Auto Manual BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Ratio Control [Auto] This item allows you to set the ratio between CPU Core Clock and FSB Frequency . The value is adjusted by typing the desired values using the numeric keypad and press the <Enter> key . Y ou can also use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. T o restore the default setting, type [auto] using the keyboard and press the <Enter> key . ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [06.0]âÂÂ[31.0] C1E Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable Enhanced Halt State support. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU TM Function [Enabled] This function enables the overheated CPU to throttle the clock speed to cool down. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] V anderpool T echnology [Enabled] The V anderpool T echnology allows a hardware platform to run multiple operating systems separately and simultaneously , enabling one system to virtually function as several systems. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Execute Disable Bit [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the No-Execution Page Protection T echnology . Setting this item to [Disabled] forces the XD feature îÂÂag to always return to zero (0). ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID V alue Limit [Disabled] Setting this item to [Enabled] allows legacy operating systems to boot even without support for CPUs with extended CPUID functions. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following item appears only when you set the CPU Ratio Control to [Auto] Intel(R) SpeedStep (TM) T ech. [Disabled] When set to [Disabled], the CPU runs at its default speed. When set to [Enabled], the CPU speed is controlled by the operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-27 4.5.2 Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Advanced Chipset Settings WARMING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. North Bridge Conî¿guration Conî¿ gure North B ridge features. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced NorthîÂÂBridgeîÂÂConîÂÂguration North Bridge Chipset Conî¿guration Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Control [Auto] PEG Port Force x1 [Disabled] BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced ENABLE: Allow remapping of overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory. DISABLE: Do not allow remapping of memory. Memory Remap Feature [Enabled] Allows you to enabled or disable the remapping of the overlapped PCI memory above the total physical memory . Enable this option only when you install 64-bit operating system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Initiate Graphic Adapter [PEG/PCI] Allows you to decide which graphics controller to use as the primary boot device. ConîÂÂguration options: [PCI/PEG] [PEG/PCI] PEG Port Control [Auto] ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [Disabled] PEG Force x1 [Disabled] This item appears when the PEG Port Control item is set to [Auto]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5.3î OnBoardîÂÂDevicesîÂÂConîÂÂguration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Onboard Device Conî¿guraiton High Deî¿nition Audio [Enabled] Front Panel Type [HD Audio] Marvell SATA/PATA Controller [Legacy Mode] Marvell Boot ROM [Enabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN1 [Enabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN2 [Enabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] VIA VT6308S Fireware 1394 [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Enable or Disable High Deî¿nition Audio Controller BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced HighîÂÂDeîÂÂnitionî AudioîÂÂ[Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the High DeîÂÂnition Audio. ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Front Panel T ype [HD Audio] This item appears only when you enable the previous item and allows you to set the front panel audio connector (AAFP) mode to legacy ACâÂÂ97 or high- deîÂÂnition audio depending on the audio standard that the front panel audio module supports. ConîÂÂguration options: [AC97] [HD Audio] Marvell SA T A/P A T A Controller [Legacy Mode] Set this item to RAID Mode to create a RAID set using the EXT_SA T A1-2 connectors and the external SA T A ports. ConîÂÂguration options: [Legacy Mode] [RAID Mode] [Disabled] Marvell Boot ROM [Enabled] This item appears only when you set the previous item to [Legacy Mode] or [RAID Mode]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Please install the Marvell î Controller driver before using the black Serial A T A connectors (EXT_SA T A1-2). Refer to 6.2.4 Make Disk menu for details.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-29 PCIE GigaBit LAN1 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you enable the previous item. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCIE GigaBit LAN2 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] This item appears only when you enable the previous item. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] VIA VT6308S Firewire 1394 [Enabled] ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows the BIOS to select the Serial Port1 base address. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] 4.5.4 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS conîÂÂgures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system conîÂÂgures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. ConîÂÂguration options: [No] [Y es] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect îÂÂeld values can cause the system to malfunction. Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] NO: lets the BIOS conî¿gure all the devices in the system. YES: lets the operating system conî¿gure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup The USB Devices Enabled item shows auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Advanced USB Conî¿guration USB Devices Enabled: 1 Mouse USB Functions [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Options Disabled Enhanced 4.5.5î USBîÂÂConîÂÂguration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. USB Functions [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB functions. The following sub-items appear when this item is set to [Enabled]. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). This item appears only when you enable the USB 2.0 Controller item. ConîÂÂguration options: [FullSpeed ] [HiSpeed ] BIOS EHCI Hand-off [Enabled] Allows you to enable support for operating systems without an EHCI hand-off feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Port 64/60 Emulation [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the I/O port 60h/64h emulation support. This item should be enabled for the complete USB keyboard legacy support for non-USB aware OSes. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to [Auto] allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-31 4.6 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4.6.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. ConîÂÂguration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.6.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 speciîÂÂcations. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ] [Enabled] 4.6.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced ConîÂÂguration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (APIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [Disabled] ACPI 2.0 Support [Disabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Conî¿guration Hardware Monitor Select the ACPI state used for System Suspend. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.5î APMîÂÂConîÂÂguration Restore On AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into of f state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. ConîÂÂguration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date / RTC Alarm Hour / RTC Alarm Minute / RTC Alarm Second will become user-conîÂÂgurable with set values. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the îÂÂrst try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on. Power On By PCI/PCIX Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PME to wake up from S5 by PCI devices. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the PCIE devices to generate a wake event. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. APM Conî¿guration Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI/PCIX Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCIE Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] <Enter> to select whether or not to restart the system after AC power loss. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-33 Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to disable the Power On by PS/2 keyboard function or set speciîÂÂc keys on the PS/2 keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Space Bar] [Ctrl-Esc] [Power Key] v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2006, American Megatrends, Inc. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Temperature v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Power Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [47úC/116.5úF] MB Temperature [32úC/89.5úF] CPU Fan Speed [4500RPM] Chassis Fan 1 Speed [N/A] Chassis Fan 2 Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed VCORE Voltage [ 1.288V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.296V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.616V] ASUS Advanced Q-Fan Control CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Q-Fan Proî¿le [Disabled] 4.6.6 Hardware Monitor CPU T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] MB T emperature [xxxúC/xxxúF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select [Ignored] if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows [N/A]. Chassis Fan 1/2 Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [Ignored] / [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed and power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the îÂÂeld shows [N/A]. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Select [Ignored] if you do not want to detect this item.
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the CPU Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The CPUîÂÂFanîÂÂProîÂÂle item appears when you enable the CPU Q-Fan Control feature. CPUîÂÂFanîÂÂProîÂÂleîÂÂ[Optimal] Allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan. When set to [Optimal], the CPU fan automatically adjusts depending on the CPU temperature. Set this item to [Silent Mode] to minimize fan speed for quiet CPU fan operation, or [Performance Mode] to achieve maximum CPU fan speed. ConîÂÂguration options: [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] [Optimal] [Silent Mode] [Performance Mode] [Performance Mode] Chassis Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the chassis Q-Fan controller . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Chassis Fan Ratio and Chassis T arget T emperature items appear when you enable the Chassis Q-Fan Control feature. Chassis Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the fan speed ratio so that the fans operate at a low CPU temperature. Setting a very low ratio may cause a dramatical fan speed drop and trigger a hardware monitor warning message. ConîÂÂguration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] Chassis T arget T emperature [37úC] The CPU fan speed will be adjusted to maintain the CPU temperature as low as the selected temperature. ConîÂÂguration options: [28úC] [31úC] [34úC] [37úC] [40úC] [43úC] [46úC] [28úC] [31úC] [34úC] [37úC] [40úC] [43úC] [46úC]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-35 4.7 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security Speciî¿es the Boot Device Priority sequence. A virtual îÂÂoppy disk drive (Floppy Drive B: ) may appear when you set the CD-ROM drive as the î¿rst boot device. 4.7.1 Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [xxx Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] [Hard Drive] [A T API CD-ROM] [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [Hard Drive] 3rd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the availabe devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.7.2î BootîÂÂSettingsîÂÂConîÂÂguration Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo2 ⢠feature. AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. ConîÂÂguration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. ConîÂÂguration options: [Off] [On] W aitîÂÂforîÂÂâÂÂF1â îÂÂIfîÂÂErrorîÂÂ[Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] HitîÂÂâÂÂDEL â îÂÂMessageîÂÂDisplayîÂÂ[Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Boot Settings Conî¿guration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-37 Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section 3.2 Jumper for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. 4.7.3 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. Select Screen Select Item Enter Change F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Security Settings Supervisor Password :Not Installed User Password :Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Change User Password <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup User Access Level [Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. ConîÂÂguration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . View Only allows access but does not allow change to any îÂÂeld. Limited allows changes only to selected îÂÂelds, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the îÂÂelds in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you set a password, this item shows Installed. T o set a User Password 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. ConîÂÂrm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully . T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. ConîÂÂguration options: [Setup] [Always] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Boot Security Settings Supervisor Password :Installed User Password :Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup]
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-39 4.8 Tools menu The T ools menu items allow you to conîÂÂgure options for special functions. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. ASUS EZ Flash 2 ASUS O.C. Proî¿le Ai Net 2 Press ENTER to run the utility to select and update BIOS. This utility doesn't support : 1.NTFS format 4.8.1 ASUS EZ Flash 2 Allows you to run ASUS EZ Flash 2. When you press <Enter>, a conîÂÂrmation message appears. Use the left/right arrow key to select between [Ok] or [Cancel], then press <Enter> to conîÂÂrm your choice. Please see section 4.1.3 for details. ASUSTek EZ Flash 2 BIOS ROM Utility V3.06 Current ROM Update ROM A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move FLASH TYPE: WINBOND W25P/X16 PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Ai Tweaker Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit
4-40 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.8.2î ASUSîÂÂO.C.îÂÂProîÂÂle This item allows you to store or load multiple BIOS settings. SaveîÂÂtoîÂÂProîÂÂeîÂÂ1/2 Allows you to save the current BIOS îÂÂle to the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to save the îÂÂle. LoadîÂÂfromîÂÂProîÂÂleîÂÂ1/2 Allows you to load the previous BIOS settings saved in the BIOS Flash. Press <Enter> to load the îÂÂle. StartîÂÂO.C.îÂÂProîÂÂle Allows you to run the utility to save and load CMOS. Press <Enter> to run the utility . ASUSTek O.C. Proî¿le Utility V1.06 Current CMOS Restore CMOS A: Note [Enter] Select or Load [B] Backup [ESC] Exit [Tab] Switch [Up/Down/Home/End] Move PATH: A:\ BOARD: P5E WS Pro VER: 0123 DATE: 08/27/07 BOARD: Unknown VER: Unknown DATE: Unknown ⢠This function can support devices such as a USB îÂÂash disk or a îÂÂoppy disk with F A T 32/16 format and single partition only . ⢠DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent the system boot failure! Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. O.C. PROFILE Conî¿guration O.C. Proî¿le 1 Status :Not Installed O.C. Proî¿le 2 Status :Not Installed Save to Proî¿le 1 Load from Proî¿le 1 Save to Proî¿le 2 Load from Proî¿le 2 Start O.C. Proî¿le Save to Proî¿le 1 BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 4-41 POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable LAN cable check during POST . When enabled, the menu reports the cable faults or shorts, and displays the point (length) where the faults or shorts are detected. ConîÂÂguration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.8.3 Ai Net 2 This menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cables connected to the LAN (RJ-45) ports. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Tools POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Ai Net 2 Pair Status Length 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A 1-2 N/A 3-6 N/A 4-5 N/A 7-8 N/A Check LAN cable during POST.
4-42 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.9 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub Screen Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit v02.61 (C)Copyright 1985-2007, American Megatrends, Inc. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Tools Exit Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit & Save Changes Once you are îÂÂnished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to save changes and exit. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to îÂÂelds other than System Date, System T ime, and Password, the BIOS asks for a conîÂÂrmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a conîÂÂrmation appears. Select YES to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a conîÂÂrmation window appears. Select YES to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM.
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter provides information on how to conîÂÂgure your hard disk drives as RAID sets. Chapter 5 RAIDîÂÂconî¿guration
5-2 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.1î RAIDîÂÂconî¿gurations The motherboard comes with two RAID controllers that allow you to conîÂÂgure Serial A T A hard disk drives as RAID sets. ⢠The Intel î ICH9R Southbridge RAID includes a high performance SA T A RAID controller that supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, and RAID 5 for six independent Serial A T A channels. ⢠Marvell î 88SE6145 RAID . Enabled by Marvell î 88SE6145 controller , the Marvell î RAID extends the advantages of software RAID beyond internal hard disk drives to external hard disk drives or port-multiplier devices. 5.1.1î RAIDîÂÂdeîÂÂnitions RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID conîÂÂguration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 5 stripes both data and parity information across three or more hard disk drives. Among the advantages of RAID 5 conîÂÂguration include better HDD performance, fault tolerance, and higher storage capacity . The RAID 5 conîÂÂguration is best suited for transaction processing, relational database applications, enterprise resource planning, and other business systems. Use a minimum of three identical hard disk drives for this setup. RAID 10 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 10* conîÂÂguration you get all the beneîÂÂts of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 conîÂÂgurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. Intel î Matrix Storage . The Intel î Matrix Storage technology supported by the ICH9R chip allows you to create a RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 5, and RAID 10* function to improve both system performance and data safety . Y ou can also combine two RAID sets to get higher performance, capacity , or fault tolerance provided by the difference RAID function. For example, RAID 0 and RAID 1 set can be created by using only two identical hard disk drives. If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy îÂÂrst the RAID driver from the support CD to a îÂÂoppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk for details.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-3 5.1.2 Installing hard disk drives The motherboard supports Serial A T A hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array . T o install the SA T A hard disks for a RAID conîÂÂguration: 1. Install the SA T A hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SA T A signal cables. 3. Connect a SA T A power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5.1.3 Setting the RAID item in BIOS Y ou must set the RAID item in the BIOS Setup before you can create a RAID set(s). T o do this: 1. Enter the BIOS Setup during POST . 2. Go to th e Ma in Men u, se le ct SA T A îÂÂC onî gur ati on , t he n p res s <E nte r>. 3. Select the item Co nîÂÂg ure îÂÂSA TA îÂÂas , then press <Enter> to display the conîÂÂguration options. 4. Select RA ID from the ConîÂÂgure SA T A as item options, then press <Enter>. 5. Save your changes, then exit the BIOS Setup. Refer to Chapter 4 for details on entering and navigating through the BIOS Setup.
5-4 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.2 Marvel î 88SE6145 RAID BIOS î Conî¿gurationîÂÂUtility The Marvell î 88SE6145 RAID BIOS ConîÂÂguration utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 10, or RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives that are connected to the Serial A T A connectors supported by the Southbridge. T o enter the Marvell î RAID BIOS ConîÂÂguration utility: 1. Install all the Serial A T A hard disk drives at Red SA T A Connector . 2. T urn on the system. 3. During POST , press <Ctrl> <M> to enter the utility main menu. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is deî¿ned! Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 4. Press <Enter> and select a desired adapter for RAID conîÂÂguration. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit S e l e c t A d a p t e r Adapter 2 [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Adapter 1
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-5 5.2.1 Creating a RAID set T o create a RAID set: 1. From the utility menu bar , select Create on the top. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: No array is deî¿ned! Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 2. Press <Enter>. The screen shows the disks you can add to make up the RAID set. Use the arrow key to select a disk and press <Enter> or <Space> to include this disk in the array . Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 3. After you have selected the desired disks, select NEXT to create array .
5-6 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 4. The Create Array screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT 5. Use the arrow key to select the RAID Level item and press <Enter> to display the available RAID set. Select a RAID set and press <Enter> to create. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT *RAID0 RAID1 RAID10 RAID5 ⢠The available RAID sets vary with the number of disks you select. The RAID sets that you are not allowed to create are grayed out. ⢠Except for the RAID Level item, we recommend you keep the default values for the other items in Create Array screen.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-7 6. A conîÂÂrmation screen appears. Press <Y> to conîÂÂrm the array creation. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Create the array?[Y] Select free disks to create ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status *0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE *4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] Create Array Raid Level : RAID0 Max Size(MB) : 2000241 Capacity(MB) : 2000241 Stripe Size : 64KB Quick Init : No Cache Mode : Write Back Array Name : Disks ID : 0 1 NEXT 7. The newly created array appears in Arrays Information. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Adapter 1 Arrays Information: ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 Disks Information: ID Port Disk Name Size Speed Status 0 0 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FULLASSIGN 4 1 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FULLASSIGN 8 2 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE 12 3 SATA: Hitachi HDS721010KLA330 1TB SATA II FREE [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete]
5-8 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.2.2 Deleting an array T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility menu bar , select Delete on the top and press <Enter> and the Delete array screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. ENTER/SPACE:Select, ESC:Back/Exit Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] 0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 2. Select a desired array to delete and select NEXT. Press <Y> after the conîÂÂrmation screen appears. Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Delete the array?[Y] Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members *0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] NEXT
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-9 3. Press <Y> again to conîÂÂrm and delete the selected array . Marvell BIOS Setup (c) 2006 Marvell Technology, Ltd. Warning: Do you want to delete the array's MBR?[Y] Delete array ID Array Name Size Level Status Stripe Members *0 2TB RAID0 ONLINE 64KB 0, 4 NEXT [ Adapter] [ Create] [ Delete] NEXT Y ou cannot recover lost data if you delete an array . Make sure you back up important data before deleting an array .
5-10 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3 Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility The Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM utility allows you to create RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and RAID 5 set(s) from Serial A T A hard disk drives. T o enter the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager Option ROM Utility: 1. T urn on the system after installing all Serial A T A hard disk drives. 2. During POST , press <Ctrl I> to display the utility main menu. The navigation keys at the bottom of the screen allow you to move through the menus and select the menu options. The RAID BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference only and may not exactly match the items on your screen. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ MAIN MENU ] 1. Create RAID Volume 2. Delete RAID Volume 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4. Exit [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None deî¿ned. Physical Disks: Port Drive Model Serial # Size Type/Status(Vol ID) 0 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 1 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 2 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XXGB Non-RAID Disk [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu The utility supports maxium four hard disk drives for RAID conîÂÂgurration.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-1 1 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (Stripe) T o create a RAID 0 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 0 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 0 (Stripe) , then press <Enter>. 4. Highlight the Disks item, then press <Enter> to select the hard disk drives you want to include in the RAID set. The SELECT DISKS screen appears. 5. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight a drive, then press <Spacebar> to select. A small triangle marks the selected drive. Press <Enter> after completing your selection. [ SELECT DISKS ] [ âÂÂâ ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k 1 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k 2 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB Non-RAID Disk 3 XXXXXX XXXXXX XX.XGB N o n - R A I D D i s k Select 2 to 4 disks to use in creating the volume. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume0 RAID0(Stripe) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-12 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 7. Highlight the Capacity item, enter the desired RAID volume capacity , then press <Enter>. The default value indicates the maximum allowed capacity . 8. When the Create V olume item is highlighted, press <Enter>. A warning message appears. 9. Press <Y> to create the RAID volume and return to the main menu, or <N> to go back to the Create Array menu. A lower stripe size is recommended for server systems. A higher stripe size is recommended for multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing. WARNING: ALL DATA ON SELECTED DISKS WILL BE LOST. Are you sure you want to create this volume? (Y/N): 6. Use the up/down arrow key to select the stripe size for the RAID 0 array , then press <Enter>. The available stripe size values range from 4 KB to 128 KB. The default stripe size is 128 KB..
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-13 5.3.2 Creating a RAID 1 set (Mirror) T o create a RAID 1 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 1 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 1 (Mirror) , then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 5 and 7 to 9 of the previous section to create the RAID 1 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID1(Mirror) Select Disks N/A 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-14 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.3 Creating a RAID 10 set (Stripe Mirror) T o create a RAID 10 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 10 (RAID0 1), then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 10 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v7.6.0.1011 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID10(RAID0 1) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-15 5.3.4 Creating a RAID 5 set (Parity) T o create a RAID 5 set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 1. Create RAID V olume , then press <Enter>. This screen appears. 2. Enter a name for the RAID 10 set, then press <Enter>. 3. Highlight RAID Level, press the up/down arrow key to select RAID 5, then press <Enter>. 4. Follow steps 4 to 9 of section 5.3.1 Creating a RAID 0 set (striped) to create the RAID 5 set. In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v5.6.2.1002 ICH9R wR AI D5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] E nt er a st ri n g be tw e en 1 a n d 16 ch ar ac t er s in le ng t h th at ca n b e u se d to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and cannot contain special characters. Name: RAID Level: Disks: Strip Size: Capacity: Volume1 RAID5(Parity) Select Disks 128KB 0.0 GB Create Volume [ âÂÂâ ]-Select [ESC]-Exit [ENTER]-Select Menu
5-16 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.5 Deleting a RAID set T o delete a RAID set: 1. From the utility main menu, select 2. Delete RAID V olume , then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to select the RAID set you want to delete, then press <Del>. This window appears. 3. Press <Y> to delete the RAID set and return to the utility main menu; otherwise, press <N> to return to the Delete V olume menu. ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST! A re y ou su re yo u wa n t to d e le te vo lu me âÂÂV ol u m eX âÂÂ? ( Y /N ): [ DELETE VOLUME VERIFICATION ] In tel (R) Ma tr ix St ora ge M ana ger Op ti on RO M v 5. 0. 0.1 032 ICH9R w RA ID 5 Copyright(C) 2003-05 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. [ DELETE VOLUME MENU ] Name Level Drives Capacity Status Bootable Volume0 RAIDX(xxxxx) X XXX.XGB Normal Yes [ HELP ] D e l e t i n g a v o lu m e w i l l d e st r oy t h e v o l u m e d a ta on t h e d r iv e (s ) a n d c a u s e a n y m e m be r d i s k s t o b e co m e a v a i l a b l e a s n on - R A I D d is k s. W A R N I N G : EXISTING DATA WITHIN THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE. [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Select [<ESC>]-Previous Menu [<Del>]-Delete Volume T ake caution when deleting a RAID set. Y ou will lose all data on the hard disk drives when you delete a RAID set.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-17 5.3.6 Resetting disks to Non-RAID T ake caution before you reset a RAID volume hard disk drive to non-RAID. Resetting a RAID volume hard disk drive deletes all internal RAID structure on the drive. T o reset a RAID set hard disk drive: 1. From the utility main menu, select 3. Reset Disks to Non-RAID, then press <Enter> to display this screen. 2. Use the up/down arrow key to highlight the RAID set drive you want to reset, then press <Space> to select. 3. Press <Enter> to reset the RAID set drive. A conîÂÂrmation message appears. 4. Press <Y> to reset the drive or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5. Follow steps 2 to 4 to select and reset other RAID set drives. [ RESET RAID DATA ] R e s e t t i n g R A I D d a t a w i l l r e m o v e i n t e r n a l R A I D s t r u c t u r e s f r o m t h e se le c t e d R A I D d i s k s . B y r e m o v i n g t h e s e s t r u c t u r e s , the drive will revert back to a non-RAID disk. WARNING: Resetting a disk causes all data on the disk to be lost. Port Drive Model Serial # Size Status 0 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB M e m b e r D i s k 1 XXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XX.XGB Member Disk Select the disks that should be reset. [ âÂÂâÂÂ]-Previous/Next [SPACE]-Selects [ENTER]-Selection Complete 5.3.7 Rebuilding the RAID This option is only for the RAID 1, RAID 5 and RAID 10 level. Rebuilding the RAID with other non-RAID disk: 1. If one member of physical SA T A Hard disk within the array is off-line or failed, the status of array will become to be degraded from normal. The following displays as:
5-18 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 2. Press <Ctrl-I> to enter the Intel Matrix Storage Manager RAID conîÂÂguration utility after POST . 3. If there is available Non-RAID SA T A Hard Disk, the utility will prompt the windows for rebuilding the RAID. Press <Enter> to select the port of destination disk for rebuilding or press <ESC> to exit The size of destination disk for rebuilding should be the same or bigger as the original hard disk. 4. After selecting, the volumes with Rebuild status will be rebuilt within the operating system. 5. Exit the SA T A RAID utility . When operating system is running, select the Intel Matrix Storage Console from the Start Menu or click the Intel Matrix Storage Manager tray icon. 6. From the View menu, select Advanced Mode to display a detailed view of the Intel Matrix Storage Console. 7. From the V olumes view in the device pane, select the RAID volume. The status will display Rebuilding % complete. After the rebuild is complete, the status will display Normal.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-19 Rebuilding the RAID with new installed disk: 1. If one member of physical SA T A Hard disk within the array is off-line or failed, the status of array will become to be degraded from normal. The following displays as. 2. Remove the failed SA T A hard disk and install the same speciîÂÂcation of new SA T A hard disk into the same SA T A Port. After reboot, the rebuild will occur automatically . The size of new disk for rebuilding should be the same or bigger as the original hard disk. 3. After selecting, the volumes with Rebuild status will be rebuilt within the operating system. 4. Exit the SA T A RAID utility . When the operating system is running, select the Intel Matrix Storage Console from the Start Menu or click the Intel Matrix Storage Manager tray icon. 5. From the View menu, select Advanced Mode to display a detailed view of the Intel Matrix Storage Console. 6. From the V olumes view in the device pane, select the RAID volume. The status will display Rebuilding % complete. After the rebuild is complete, the status will display Normal.
5-20 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration 5.3.8 Exiting the Intel î Matrix Storage Manager T o exit the utility: 1. From the utility main menu, select 4. Exit , then press <Enter>. This window appears. Are you sure you want to exit? (Y/N): [ CONFIRM EXIT ] 2. Press <Y> to exit or press <N> to return to the utility main menu. 5.3.9 Setting the Boot array use MB BIOS Setup Utility 1. When creating multi-raid via Intel(r) Matrix Storage Manager RAID, we would like to assign one array to be the boot drive. The following shows as the status of current arrays: 2. Re-boot the system and press <Del> to enter the Motherboard BIOS Setup Utility during POST . 3. Go to [Boot] menu âÂÂ> [Boot Device Priority]. Then, select the desired boot array and use < > or <-> key to change the boot device priority . Boot Settings Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Conî¿guration Security BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 5-21 5.3.10 Global Array Manager Y ou may also create a RAID set(s) in Windows î operating environment using the Global Array Manager (GAM) application. The GAM application is available from the motherboard support CD. Refer to the GAM user guide in the motherboard support CD for details. 4. Exit the BIOS Setup Utility and save the changes. Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [ATAPI CD-ROM] 3rd Boot Device [Hard Drive] Speciî¿es the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. BIOS SETUP UTILITY Main Advanced Power Boot Exit
5-22 Chapter 5: RAID conîÂÂguration
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This chapter provides information on how to install the drivers for system components. This chapter also describes the software applications that the barebone workstation supports. Chapter 6 Driver installation
6-2 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.1 RAID driver installation A îÂÂoppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. For Windows î Vista operating system, use either a îÂÂoppy disk or a USB device with the RAID driver . 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk without entering the OS T o create a RAID/SA T A driver disk without entering the OS 1. Boot your computer . 2. Press <Del> during POST to enter the BIOS setup utility . 3. Set the optical drive as the primary boot device. 4. Insert the support DVD into the optical drive. 5. Save changes and exit BIOS. 6. Press any key when the system prompts âÂÂPress any key to boot from the optical drive.â 7. When the menu appears, press <1> to create a RAID driver disk. 8. Insert a formatted îÂÂoppy disk into the îÂÂoppy drive then press <Enter>. 9. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. 6.1.2 Creating a RAID/SA T A driver disk in Windows î T o create a RAID driver disk in Windows î environment 1. Start Windows î . 2. Place the motherboard support DVD into the optical drive. 3. Go to the Make Disk menu, then select the RAID driver disk you wish to create: ⢠Click Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 32bit Driver to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 32-bit system. ⢠Click Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 64bit Driver to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 64-bit system. 4. Insert a îÂÂoppy disk/USB device into the îÂÂoppy disk drive/USB port. 5. Follow succeeding screen instructions to complete the process. Write-protect the îÂÂoppy disk to avoid computer virus infection.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-3 6.1.3 Installing the RAID controller driver Windows î XP OS T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î XP OS 1. Boot the computer using the Windows î XP installation CD. The Windows î XP Setup starts. 2. Press <F6> when the message â Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver ... â appears at the bottom of the screen. 3. When prompted, press <S> to specify an additional device. S=Specify Additional Device ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter. Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices(s): <none> * To specify additional SCSI adapters, CD-ROM drives, or special disk controllers for use with Windows, including those for which you have a device support disk from a mass storage device manufacturer, press S. * If you do not have any device support disks from a mass storage device manufacturer, or do not want to specify additional mass storage devices for use with Windows, press ENTER. 4. Insert the RAID driver disk you created earlier to the îÂÂoppy disk drive, then press <Enter>. ENTER=Continue ESC=Cancel F3=Exit Windows Setup Please insert the disk labeled Manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk into Drive A: * Press ENTER when ready.
6-4 Chapter 6: Driver installation 5. Select the RAID controller driver from the list, then press <Enter>. Marvell 6145 SA T A Controller Select Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller 32bit Driver for 32bit Windows Server OS, Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller 64bit Driver for 64bit Windows Server OS, Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller V ista 32bit Driver for 32bit Windows Vista OS, or Marvell 61XX SA T A Controller Vista 64bit Driver for 64bit Windows Vista OS, and then press <Enter>. ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup You have chosen to conî¿gure a SCSI Adapter for use with Windows, using a device support disk provided by an adapter manufacturer. Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen. Marvell 61xx SATA Controller 32bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller 64bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller Vista 32bit Driver Marvell 61xx SATA Controller Vista 64bit Driver Intel Matrix Storage Select Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SA T A RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH) for Intel Matrix Storage RAID mode from the list, then press <Enter>. If you conîÂÂgured SA T A as AHCI Mode in the BIOS setup utility of IDE ConîÂÂguration, îÂÂrst install the Intel SA T A AHCI Driver during windows setup. Then, select the Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SA T A AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7RDH) from the list. Refer to section 6.1.1 Creating a RAID driver disk to create the Intel SA T A Driver for windows system. ENTER=Continue F3=Exit Windows Setup You have chosen to conî¿gure a SCSI Adapter for use with Windows, using a device support disk provided by an adapter manufacturer. Select the SCSI Adapter you want from the following list, or press ESC to return to the previous screen. Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) Intel(R) 82801GR/GH SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH7R/DH) Intel(R) 82801FR SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH6R) Intel(R) 82801FR SATA AHCI Controller (Desktop ICH6R) Intel(R) 82801FBM SATA AHCI Controller (Mobile ICH6M) Intel(R) 82801ER SATA RAID Controller (Desktop ICH5R) Intel(R) 6300ESB SATA RAIID Controller
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-5 6. The Windows î Setup loads the RAID controller drivers from the RAID driver disk. When prompted, press <Enter> to continue installation. 7. Setup then proceeds with the OS installation. Follow screen instructions to continue. 6.1.4 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î XP/64-bit XP/Vista/64-bit V ista operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary . Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î XP Service Pack 2 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability . Windows î Vista OS T o install the RAID controller driver when installing Windows î Vista OS 1. Insert the îÂÂoppy disk with RAID driver into the îÂÂoppy disk drive. 2. During the OS installation, select Load Driver , click Browse , then select Floppy Disk Drive (A:) . Click OK . 3. Select Intel ICH9R and click Next. 4. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation.
6-6 Chapter 6: Driver installation If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support DVD to locate the îÂÂle ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the DVD. Click an item to install 6.2 Support DVD information The support DVD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. The contents of the support DVD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www .asus.com) for updates. 6.2.1 Running the support DVD Place the support DVD to the optical drive. The DVD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click an icon to display support DVD/motherboard information
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-7 6.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. ASUS InstAll - Installation Wizard for Drivers Installs all of the drivers through the Installation Wizard. Intel(R) Chipset Inf Update Program Installs the Intel î chipset Inf update program. Realtek Audio Driver Installs the Realtek î ALC 888 audio driver and application. USB 2.0 Driver Installs the Universal Serial Bus 2.0 (USB 2.0) driver .
6-8 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS InstAll-Installation Wizard for Utilities Installs all of the utilities through the Installation Wizard. ASUS PC Probe II This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition. ASUS AI Suite Installs the ASUS AI Suite. Click to display the next page Click to return to the previous page
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-9 ASUS Update Allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. Adobe Acrobat Reader V7.0 Installs the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader that allows you to open, view , and print documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). Microsoft DirectX 9.0c Installs the Microsoft î DirectX 9.0 driver . The Microsoft DirectX î 9.0 is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sound. DirectX î improves the multimedia features of you computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer . Visit the Microsoft website (www .microsoft.com) for updates. WinDVD Copy5 T rial DVD Copy5 T rial Installs the InterVideo DVD Copy5 trial version. InterVideo MediaOne Gallery Installs the media library and all-in-one software. Ulead PhotoImpact 12 SE Installs the PhotoImpact image editing software. CyberLink PowerBackup Installs CyberLink PowerBackup to back up and restore your data easily . CorelîÂÂSnapîÂÂreîÂÂPlusîÂÂSE Installs Corel SnapîÂÂre Plus SE. Anti-Virus Utility The anti-virus application detects and protects your computer from viruses that destroys data.
6-10 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.4 Make Disk menu The Make Disk menu contains items to create Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk/ Marvell î 61xx P A T A/eSA T A driver disk. Make Intel ICH9R AHCI/RAID 32bit/64bit Driver Allows you to create an Intel î ICH9R RAID driver disk for a 32/64-bit system. Make Marvell 61xx P A T A/eSA T A Driver Allows you to create a Marvell î 61xx P A T A/eSA T A driver disk.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-11 6.2.5 Manual menu The Manual menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. Most user manual îÂÂles are in Portable Document Format (PDF). Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities tab before opening a user manual îÂÂle. 6.2.6 ASUS Contact information Click the Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. Y ou can also îÂÂnd this information on the inside front cover of this user guide.
6-12 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.2.7 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support DVD. Click an icon to display the speciîÂÂed information. Motherboard Info Displays the general speciîÂÂcations of the motherboard. Browse this DVD Displays the support DVD contents in graphical format.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-13 T echnical support Form Displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to îÂÂll out when requesting technical support. Filelist Displays the contents of the support DVD and a brief description of each in text format.
6-14 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3 Software information Most of the applications in the Support DVD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme îÂÂle that came with the software application for more information. 6.3.1 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On Self-T ests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the Support DVD. See section 6.2.3 Utilities menu for details. T o launch the ASUS MyLogo2⢠1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . Refer to section 4.1.1 ASUS Update utility for details. 2. Select Options from the drop down menu, then click Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before îÂÂashing BIOS, then click Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a îÂÂle from the drop down menu, then click Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS îÂÂle, then click Next . The ASUS MyLogo window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogo2â¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS îÂÂle, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section 4.1.4 AFUDOS utility . ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See section 4.7.2 Boot Settings ConîÂÂguration . ⢠Y ou can create your own boot logo image in GIF îÂÂle format. ⢠The îÂÂle size should be smaller than 150 K.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-15 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility , îÂÂash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After îÂÂashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST . 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
6-16 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.2î AudioîÂÂconîÂÂgurations The Realtek î audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your computer . The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF Out support, and interrupt capability . The CODEC also includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for all audio ports, eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. Follow the installation wizard to install the Realtek î Audio Driver from the support CD/DVD that came with the motherboard package. If the Realtek audio software is correctly installed, you will îÂÂnd the Realtek HD Audio Manager icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundEffect icon to display the Realtek HD Audio Manager . Realtek HD Audio Manager A. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows Vista⢠Control settings window ConîÂÂgurationî option tabs Information button Exit button Minimize button Device advanced settings Connector settings Analog and digital connector status Set default device button
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-17 Device advanced settings Click Device advanced settings to show further settings for the playback and recording device. Information Click the Information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. Connector settings Click the Connector Settings button ( ) to show further settings for the analog/digital output/input ports. Exit Click the Exit button or the OK button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager . ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings. The ConîÂÂguration options shown in this section are for reference purposes only and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. In the Windows Vista⢠environment, Realtek HD Audio Manager automatically detects devices connected to the analog/digital ports and shows corresponding conîÂÂguration options tabs.
6-18 Chapter 6: Driver installation Digital Output The Realtek î audio CODEC allows you to connect an external audio output device via the coaxial/digital S/PDIF port. Y ou can set your listening environment, set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the digital output options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Digital Output tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the digital output port as the default audio output device. 3. Click the Sound Effects sub-tab for options on changing the acoustic environment and karaoke settings, or click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio output format. 4. Click to effect the Digital Output settings and exit. Speakers The Speakers tab allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output settings using the analog audio ports. T o set the speakers options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Speakers tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the analog ports as the default audio output device. 3. Click the SpeakerîÂÂConîÂÂguration sub-tab for audio channel options and test. 4. Click the Sound Effects sub-tab for options on changing the acoustic environment and karaoke settings. 5. Click the Room Correction sub-tab for individual speaker distance adjustment. 6. Click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio output format. 7. Click to effect the Speakers settings and exit.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-19 Line In The Line In tab allows you to conîÂÂgure audio input settings using the analog line in port. T o set the analog line in options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Line In tab. 2. Click Set Default Device to set the analog line in port as the default audio input device. 3. The Line In tab allows you to adjust the recording and playback volume and set a default format for audio input. 4. Click to effect the Line In settings and exit. Microphone The Microphone tab allows you to conîÂÂgure the audio input settings using the analog microphone port and to check if your microphone device is connected properly . T o set the Microphone options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. In the Microphone Effects sub- tab, click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. Click the Beam Forming option button to eliminate surrounding noise interferences. 3. Click the Default Format sub-tab for options on changing the default audio input format. 4. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit.
6-20 Chapter 6: Driver installation Control settings window ConîÂÂgurationî options Information button Exit button Minimize button B. Realtek HD Audio Manager for Windows XP⢠Information Click the information button ( ) to display information about the audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller , audio codec, and language setting. Minimize Click the minimize button ( ) to minimize the window . Exit Click the exit button ( ) to exit the Realtek HD Audio Manager .
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-21 Sound Effect The Realtek î audio CODEC allows you to set your listening environment, adjust the equalizer , set the karaoke, or select pre-programmed equalizer settings for your listening pleasure. T o set the sound effect options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Sound Effect tab. 2. Click the shortcut buttons or the drop-down menus for options on changing the acoustic environment, adjust the equalizer , or set the karaoke to your desired settings. 3. Click to effect the Sound Ef fect settings and exit. Mixer The Mixer option allows you to conîÂÂgure audio output (playback) volume and audio input (record) volume. T o set the mixer options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Mixer tab. 2. T urn the volume buttons to adjust the Playback and/or Record volu me. The Mixer option activates voice input from all channels by default. Make sure to set all channels to mute ( ) if you do not want voice input. 3. Make adjustments to W ave, SW Synth, Front, Rear , CD volume, Mic volume, Line V olume, and Stereo mix, etc. by clicking the control tabs and dragging them up and down until you get the desired levels. Click the next button ( ) to display more menu options. 4. Click to effect the Mixer settings and exit. ConîÂÂgurationîÂÂoptions Click any of the tabs in this area to conîÂÂgure your audio settings.
6-22 Chapter 6: Driver installation Audio I/O The Audio I/O option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings. T o set the Audio I/O options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Audio I/O tab. 2. Click the drop-down menu to select the channel conîÂÂguration. 3. The con trol set tings window d isplays the status of connected devices. Click for analog and digital options. 4. Click <OK> to effect the Audio I/O settings and exit Microphone The Microphone option allows you conîÂÂgure your input/output settings and to check if your audio devices are connected properly . T o set the Microphone options 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the Microphone tab. 2. Click the Noise Suppression option button to reduce the static background noise when recording. 3. Click the Acoustic Echo Cancellation option button to reduce the echo from the front speakers when recording. 4. Click the Beam Forming option button to eliminate surrounding noise interferences. Click to start microphone calibration. 5. Click to effect the Microphone settings and exit.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-23 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo option gives you a demonstration of the 3D audio feature. T o start the 3D Audio Demo 1. From the Realtek HD Audio Manager , click the 3D Audio Demo tab. 2. Click the option buttons to change the sound, moving path, or environment settings. 3. Click to test your settings. 4. Click to effect the 3D Audio Demo settings and exit.
6-24 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.3 ASUS PC Probe II PC Probe II is a utility that monitors the computer âÂÂs vital components, and detects and alerts you of any problem with these components. PC Probe II senses fan rotations, CPU temperature, and system voltages, among others. Because PC Probe II is software-based, you can start monitoring your computer the moment you turn it on. With this utility , you are assured that your computer is always at a healthy operating condition. Installing PC Probe II T o install PC Probe II on your computer: 1. Place the Support DVD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. If Autorun is not enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the Support DVD to locate the setup.exe îÂÂle from the ASUS PC Probe II folder . Double-click the setup.exe îÂÂle to start installation. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click ASUS PC Probe II . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching PC Probe II Y ou can launch the PC Probe II right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the PC Probe II from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > PC Probe II > PC Probe II v1.xx.xx . The PC Probe II main window appears. After launching the application, the PC Probe II icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using PC Probe II Main window The PC Probe II main window allows you to view the current status of your system and change the utility conîÂÂguration. By default, the main window displays the Preference section. Y ou can close or restore the Preference section by clicking on the triangle on the main window right handle. Click to close the Preference panel
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-25 Sensor alert When a system sensor detects a problem, the main window right handle turns red, as the illustrations below show . When displayed, the monitor panel for that sensor also turns red. Refer to the Monitor panels section for details. Button Function Opens the ConîÂÂguration window Opens the Report window Opens the Desktop Management Interface window Opens the Peripheral Component Interconnect window Opens the Windows Management Instrumentation window Opens the hard disk drive, memory , CPU usage window Shows/Hides the Preference section Minimizes the application Closes the application Preference Y ou can customize the application using the Preference section in the main window . Click the box before each preference to activate or deactivate.
6-26 Chapter 6: Driver installation Changing the monitor panels position T o change the position of the monitor panels in the desktop, click the arrow down button of the Scheme options, then select another position from the list box. Click OK when îÂÂnished. Moving the monitor panels All monitor panels move together using a magnetic effect. If you want to detach a monitor panel from the group, click the horseshoe magnet icon. Y ou can now move or reposition the panel independently . Hardware monitor panels The hardware monitor panels display the current value of a system sensor such as fan rotation, CPU temperature, and voltages. The hardware monitor panels come in two display modes: hexagonal (large) and rectangular (small). When you check the Enable Monitoring Panel option from the Preference section, the monitor panels appear on your computer âÂÂs desktop. Large display Small display Click to increase value Click to decrease value Adjusting the sensor threshold value Y ou can adjust the sensor threshold value in the monitor panel by clicking the or buttons. Y ou can also adjust the threshold values using the ConîÂÂg window . Y ou cannot adjust the sensor threshold values in a small monitoring panel.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-27 Monitoring sensor alert The monitor panel turns red when a component value exceeds or is lower than the threshold value. Refer to the illustrations below . Large display Small display WMI browser Click to display the WMI (Windows Management Instrumentation) browser . This browser displays various Windowsî management information. Click an item from the left panel to display on the right panel. Click the plus sign ( ) before WMI Information to display the available information. Y ou can enlarge or reduce the browser size by dragging the bottom right corner of the browser . DMI browser Click to display the DMI (Desktop Management Interface) browser . This browser displays various desktop and system information. Click the plus sign ( ) before DMI Information to display the available information.
6-28 Chapter 6: Driver installation PCI browser Click to display the PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) browser . This browser provides information on the PCI devices installed on your system. Click the plus sign ( ) before the PCI Information item to display available information. Hard disk drive space usage The Hard Disk tab displays the used and available hard disk drive space. The left panel of the tab lists all logical drives. Click a hard disk drive to display the information on the right panel. The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available HDD space. Memory usage The Memory tab shows both used and available physical memory . The pie chart at the bottom of the window represents the used (blue) and the available Usage The Usage browser displays real-time information on the CPU, hard disk drive space, and memory usage. Click to display the Usage browser .
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-29 ConîÂÂguringîÂÂPCîÂÂProbeîÂÂII Click to view and adjust the sensor threshold values. The ConîÂÂg window has two tabs: Sensor/Threshold and Preference. The Sensor/ Threshold tab enables you to activate the sensors or to adjust the sensor threshold values. The Preference tab allows you to customize sensor alerts, or change the temperature scale. Loads the default threshold values for each sensor Applies your changes Cancels or ignores your changes Lo ad s y ou r s av ed co nî gur at ion Saves your conîÂÂguration CPU usage The CPU tab displays real- time CPU usage in line graph representation. If the CPU has an enabled Hyper-Threading, two separate line graphs display the operation of the two logical processors.
6-30 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.4 ASUS AI Suite ASUS AI Suite allows you to launch AI Gear 2, AI N.O.S., AI Booster , AI Nap, and Q-Fan 2 utilities easily . Installing AI Suite T o install AI Suite on your computer: 1. Place the support DVD to the optical drive. The Drivers installation tab appears if your computer has an enabled Autorun feature. 2. Click the Utilities tab, then click AI Suite . 3. Follow the screen instructions to complete installation. Launching AI Suite Y ou can launch the AI Suite right after installation or anytime from the Windows î desktop. T o launch the AI Suite from the Windows î desktop, click Start > All Programs > ASUS > AI Suite > AI Suite v1.xx.xx . The AI Suite main window appears. After launching the application, the AI Suite icon appears in the Windows î taskbar . Click this icon to close or restore the application. Using AI Suite Click the AI N.O.S., AI Gear 2, AI Nap, AI Booster , or Q-Fan 2 icon to launch the utility , or click the Normal icon to restore the system to normal state. Press to launch AI Gear 2 Press to launch AI Nap Pres s to la unch AI N.O.S. Press to launch Q-Fan 2 Pr ess to l aun ch A I Bo ost er Press to restore to normal
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-31 Other feature buttons Click on right corner of the main window to open the monitor window . Click on right corner of the expanded window to switch the temperature from degrees Centigrade to degrees Fahrenheit. Displays the CPU/ system temperature, CPU/memory/PCIE voltage, and CPU/ chassis fan speed Displays the FSB/CPU frequency
6-32 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.5 ASUS AI Gear 2 ASUS AI Gear 2 provides four system performance options that allows you to select the best performance setting for your computing needs. This easy-to-use utility adjusts the processor frequency and vCore voltage to minimize system noise and power consumption. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch AI Gear 2 by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on your Windows OS taskbar and then click the AI Gear 2 button on the AI Suite main window . Shift the gear to the performance setting that you like. Maximum Performance Medium Performance High Performance Maximum Power Saving
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-33 6.3.6 ASUS AI Nap This feature allows you to minimize the power consumption of your computer whenever you are away . Enable this feature for minimum power consumption and a quieter system operation. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI Nap button on the AI Suite main window . Click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o exit AI Nap mode, press the system power or mouse button then click Y es on the conîÂÂrmation screen. T o switch the power button functions from AI Nap to shutting down, just right click the AI Suite icon on the OS taskbar , select AI Nap and click Use power button . Unclick the the item to switch the function back.
6-34 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.7 ASUS AI N.O.S. This ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System feature intelligently determines the system load and automatically boosts the performance for the most demanding tasks. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows OS taskbar and click the AI N.O.S. button on the AI Suite main window . drop-down menu button select an N.O.S. mode Click the drop-down menu button and select Disable or Manual. Click Apply at the bottom to save the conîÂÂguration.
ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 6-35 6.3.8 ASUS Q-Fan 2 This ASUS Q-Fan 2 Control feature allows you to set the appropriate performance level of the CPU Q-Fan 2 or the Chassis Q-Fan 2 for more efîÂÂcient system operation. After enabling the Q-Fan 2 function, the fans can be set to automatically adjust depending on the temperature, to decrease fan speed, or to achieve the maximum fan speed. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the Q-Fan 2 button on the AI Suite mAIn window . Click the drop-down menu button and display the fan names. Select CPU Q-Fan or CHASSIS Q-Fan . Click the Enabled box to activate this function. drop-down list button Enable Q-Fan 2 box ProîÂÂle list appears after clicking the Enabled box. Click the drop-down list button and select a proîÂÂle. Optimal mode makes the fans adjust speed with the temperature; Silent mode minimizes fan speed for quiet fan operation; Performance mode boosts the fan to achieve maximal fan speed for the best cooling effect. click to display the drop- down list and select a Q-Fan 2 mode Click Apply at the bottom to save the setup.
6-36 Chapter 6: Driver installation 6.3.9 ASUS AI Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in WIndows î environment without the hassle of booting the BIOS. After installing AI Suite from the bundled support DVD, you can launch the utility by double-clicking the AI Suite icon on the Windows î OS taskbar and click the AI Booster button on the AI Suite main window . The options on the taskbar allow you to use the default settings, adjust CPU/ Memory/PCI-E frequency manually , or create and apply your personal overclocking conîÂÂgurations.
3- ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 This section provides information about the CPU features and technologies and a troubleshooting guide for solving common problems when using the barebone workstation. Appendix Reference information
Appendix: Reference information A-2 A.1 Intel î EM64T ⢠The motherboard is fully compatible with Intel î LGA775 processors running on 32-bit operating systems. ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EM64T . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS îÂÂle. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EM64T feature. ⢠Visit www .microsoft.com for more information on Windows î 64-bit OS. A.2 Enhanced Intel SpeedStep î Technology (EIST) ⢠The motherboard comes with a BIOS îÂÂle that supports EIST . Y ou can download the latest BIOS îÂÂle from the ASUS website (www .asus.com/ support/download/) if you need to update the BIOS. See Chapter 4 for details. ⢠Visit www .intel.com for more information on the EIST feature. A.2.1 System requirements Before using EIST , check your system if it meets the following requirements: ⢠Intel î processor with EIST support ⢠BIOS îÂÂle with EIST support ⢠Operating system with EIST support (Windows î Vista, Windows î XP SP2 / Linux 2.6 kernel or later versions) Using the Intel î EM64T feature T o use the Intel î EM64T feature: 1. Install an Intel î CPU that supports the Intel î EM64T . 2. Install a 64-bit operating system (Windows î Vista 64-bit Edition or Windows î XP Professional x64 Edition). 3. Install the 64-bit drivers for the motherboard components and devices from the support DVD. 4. Install the 64-bit drivers for expansion cards or add-on devices, if any . Refer to the expansion card or add-on device(s) documentation, or visit the related website, to verify if the card/device supports a 64-bit system.
A-3 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 A.2.2 Using the EIST T o use the EIST feature: 1. T urn on the computer , then enter the BIOS Setup. 2. Go to the Advanced Menu, highlight CPUîÂÂConîÂÂguration, then press <Enter>. 3. Set the Intel(R) SpeedStep T echnology item to [Enabled], and then press <Enter>. 4. Press <F10> to save your changes and exit the BIOS setup. 5. After the computer restarts, right click on a blank space on the desktop, then select Properties from the pop-up menu. 6. When the Display Properties window appears, click the Screen Saver tab. 7. Click the Power button on the Monitor power section to open the Power Options Properties window . 8. On the Power schemes section, click , then select any option except Home/OfîÂÂce Desktop or Always On. 9. Click Apply, then click OK. 10. Close the Display Properties window . After you adjust the power scheme, the CPU internal frequency slightly decreases when the CPU loading is low . The screen displays and procedures may vary depending on the operating system.
Appendix: Reference information A-4 A.3 Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠The motherboard supports Intel î Pentiumî LGA775 processors with Hyper-Threading T echnology . ⢠Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows î Vista/XP and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in the BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠Installing Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later version is recommended. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www .intel. com/info/hyperthreading. Using the Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology: 1. Install an Intel î Pentium î CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 2. Power up the system and enter the BIOS Setup. Under the Advanced menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to [Enabled]. The BIOS item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper- Threading T echnology . 3. Restart the computer .
A-5 ASUS TW300-E5/PI4 A.4î SimpleîÂÂî¿xes Some problems that you may encounter are not due to defects on the system or the components. These problems only requires simple troubleshooting actions that you can perform by yourself. Problem Action The power LED on the workstation or on the monitor do not light up 1. Check if the power cable is properly connected to the power connector in the system rear panel. 2. Ensure that the power cables are connected to a grounded power outlet. 3. Press the power button to make sure that the system is turned on. The keyboard does not work Check if the keyboard cable is properly connected to the PS/2 keyboard port. The mouse does not work Check if the mouse cable is properly connected to the mouse port. The system does not perform power- on self tests (POST) after it was turned on 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed the DIMMs the system supports. 2. Ensure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The system continuously beeps after it was turned on. 1. Check the memory modules and make sure you installed supported DIMMs. 2. Ensure that the DIMMs are properly installed on the sockets. The message âÂÂNon-system disk or disk errorâ appears 1. Check if a bootable HDD is active. 2. Check if the HDDs are properly installed. Network connection not available 1. Ensure that the network cable is connected to the LAN port on the rear panel. 2. Ensure that you have installed the LAN drivers from the support CD.
Appendix: Reference information A-6